Prévia do material em texto

O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
Horizontes com infinitas possibilidades.
Este é um guia para uma viagem incrível, 
com experiências que vão te levar a 
novos universos, expandindo sua mente, 
sua visão e o seu desejo de ir além.
O inglês da Wise Up 
vai levar você a 
descobrir novos 
horizontes pessoais 
e profissionais.
LANGUAGE
GUIDE
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
AUTOR:
Sérgio Barreto
COAUTORAS:
Mylene Guedes e Natasha Nunes
EDITORAS:
Fátima Machado e Amanda Campos
GERENTE DE PESQUISA E DESENVOLVIMENTO:
Márcia Frantz
EQUIPE DE PESQUISA E DESENVOLVIMENTO:
Edu Rocha, Felipe Ceschin, Gilliatt Moreira 
Neto, Glaucio Santos, Gustavo Telles, Hérica 
Rodrigues, Maria Cristina Carmo, Ruth 
Gaynor, Sonia Alves e Tassia Trajano
ILUSTRADORES:
Estúdio Pinta Giribita
DESIGNERS GRÁFICOS:
Bruna M. Fraga, Deborah Naomi Kosaka, 
Eduardo Neves, Gabrielle Menezes 
e Willian Lopes
DIAGRAMADORES:
Deborah Naomi Kosaka e Willian Lopes 
PROJETO GRÁFICO:
Patrícia Figuerôa Knack
ARTE-FINALISTA:
Anderson Oliveira
PRODUTORA GRÁFICA:
Debora Oliveira
PRODUTORA EDITORIAL:
Ana Freitas
PRESIDENTE:
Flávio Augusto da Silva
PRODUÇÃO marchello74 / Shutterstock.com
Natali Glado / Shutterstock.com
photo.ua / Shutterstock.com
Hung Chung Chih / Shutterstock.com
Kathy Hutchins / Shutterstock.com
Bloomicon / Shutterstock.com
Pius Lee / Shutterstock.com
Sean Pavone / Shutterstock.com
oneinchpunch / Shutterstock.com
Ivan Kurmyshov / Shutterstock.com
Luciano Mortula - LGM / Shutterstock.com
themorningglory / Shutterstock.com
Sviat Studio / Shutterstock.com
Thomas La Mela / Shutterstock.com
Gino Santa Maria / Shutterstock.com
PhuuchaayHYBRID / Shutterstock.com
littleny / Shutterstock.com
Resul Muslu / Shutterstock.com
lembi / Shutterstock.comTO
D
A
S
 A
S
 I
M
A
G
E
N
S
 D
O
 S
H
U
T
T
E
R
S
TO
C
K
ISBN: 
978-85-8187-049-6
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
O Language Guide é dedicado a todos 
alunos que decidiram, em algum momento, 
aprender uma língua estrangeira. Este guia 
pretende honrar sua dedicação e esforço 
como estudantes de uma nova língua. 
Eu jamais teria pensado em criar este 
guia se não fosse por vocês.
SÉRGIO BARRETO
AUTOR E DIRETOR DE PESQUISA
E DESENVOLVIMENTO
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
O Language Guide da Wise Up busca proporcionar aos alunos 
explicações claras, simples e objetivas sobre tópicos gramaticais 
e o uso da língua inglesa. Cada tópico é acompanhado por um vídeo 
na plataforma online da Wise Up que contextualiza o tópico estudado. 
Os tópicos podem conter as seguintes seções:
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
• Use and Structure
Uso – Quando o tópico ou estrutura é utilizado? 
Estrutura – Como funciona a estrutura? Como as frases ou orações são formadas?
• Stay Alert 
Características ou pontos específicos referentes ao tópico estudado que precisam 
de maior atenção
• Examples in Context
Pequenos diálogos que contextualizam o tópico linguístico apresentado em um nível 
discursivo
• Common Mistakes
Erros comuns que os alunos cometem ao usar as estruturas ou tópicos linguísticos 
apresentados
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L E S S O N 1
Adjectives 
Indefinite Articles 
Greetings and Farewells 
Verb To Be + Subject Pronouns 
L E S S O N 2
Demonstrative Pronouns 
Question Words: Who and What 
Verb To Be: Review 
Verb To Have 
L E S S O N 3
Greetings and Farewells 
Question Words: How old 
Verbs To Be, To Like, To Work, To Live, To Have 
Cardinal Numbers, Family Members, and Pets 
L E S S O N 4
Addresses 
Adjectives to Describe Places 
Prepositions of Time and Place 
Question Words: Where and When 
R E V I E W
How to Make a Personal Presentation 
L E S S O N 5
Articles: Definite and Indefinite 
Connectors: And, But, and So 
Imperatives 
Likes and Dislikes 
Expressing Possession: Possessive Adjectives 
L E S S O N 6
Imperatives 
Question Words: Review 
Expressing Time 
Question Word: What Time 
p 18
p 19
p 22
p 23
p 24
p 25
p 27
p 29
p 31
p 32
p 33
p 36
p 38
p 38
p 40
p 42
p 44
p 47
p 48
p 50
p 52
p 53
p 54
p 55
p 56
p 57
CONTENTS BASIC 1
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
BASIC2
L E S S O N 1
Articles: Definite, Indefinite, and Zero 
Greetings and Farewells 
Plural Forms 
Simple Present 
L E S S O N 2
Adjectives for Personal Description 
Demonstrative Pronouns 
Present Continuous 
Simple Present 
L E S S O N 3
Adverbs of Frequency 
Present Continuous: Spelling Rules 
Question Words: Review 
Question Word: How Often 
L E S S O N 4
Adjectives to Describe Places 
Intensifiers 
Simple Present vs. Present Continuous 
There + To Be 
R E V I E W
How to Talk About Your Schedule 
L E S S O N 5
Basic Connectors: And, But, So 
Expressing Possession: Review 
Imperatives 
Likes and Dislikes 
Making Requests 
L E S S O N 6
Making Requests: Review 
Possessive Pronouns 
Question Words: Review + Question Word: Whose 
Expressing Time 
p 60
p 61
p 64
p 66
p 68
p 70
p 72
p 74
p 76
p 78
p 80
p 83
p 85
p 88
p 90
p 92
p 93
p 95
p 97
p 99
p 101
p 103
p 105
p 106
p 108
p 110
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
ordh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
BASIC3
L E S S O N 1
Definite, Indefinite, and Zero Articles 
Plural Forms 
Regular Verbs and Verb To Be 
Time Expressions About the Past 
L E S S O N 2
Simple Present vs. Present Continuous 
How Much and How Many, Numbers, and Some and Any 
Irregular Verbs 
Time Expressions About the Past and the Present 
L E S S O N 3
Countable and Uncountable Nouns and Expressions 
Object Pronouns 
Shopping 
Simple Past: Review 
L E S S O N 4
Expressing Quantity 
How Old, How Often, How Far, 
How Much, and How Many 
There + To Be: Present and Past 
Used To 
R E V I E W
How to Talk About Your Background 
L E S S O N 5
Basic Connectors: And, But, So, Or 
Giving and Asking Opinion 
Giving Directions 
Making Requests and Offers 
Question Word: Why 
L E S S O N 6
Giving and Asking Opinion 
Expressing Possession 
Question Words: How and Why 
Used To vs. Simple Past 
p 114
p 116
p 118
p 119
p 120
p 123
p 126
p 128
p 130
p 132
p 133
p 136
p 138
p 140
p 142
p 144
p 145
p 146
p 148
p 149
p 150
p 152
p 153
p 154
p 155
p 157
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
INTERMEDIATE 1
L E S S O N 1
Giving Opinion: Agreeing and Disagreeing/ 
Asking and Introducing Opinion 
Giving Opinion: Fillers and Expressions 
Modal Verb: Will 
Time Expressions About the Future 
L E S S O N 2
Connectors: When and While 
Giving Opinion: Being Subtle and Emphatic 
Past Continuous 
Time Expressions in a Narrative 
L E S S O N 3
Expressing Quantity: Review 
Modal Verbs: Can and Could 
Pronoun Review and Reflexive Pronouns 
Simple Past vs. Past Continuous 
L E S S O N 4
Giving Opinion: Expressing Certainty and Doubt 
Modal Verb Must and Have To 
Modal Verbs: Must and Should 
Narrative Timeline 
R E V I E W
How to Make Predictions and 
Express Different Degrees of Certainty 
L E S S O N 5
Connectors: Addition and Contrast 
Giving Opinion: Asking for Clarification 
and Checking Understanding 
Giving Opinion: Review 
Modal Verbs: May and Might 
Relative Pronouns: Who and That 
L E S S O N 6
Connectors: Conclusion 
Modal Verbs: Review 
Reasoning: Why 
Be Used To vs. Used To 
p 160
p 161
p 163
p 164
p 165
p 166
p 169
p 170
p 172
p 174
p 176
p 177
p 179
p 180
p 182
p 183
p 185
p 186
p 190
p 191
p 193
p 194
p 195
p 197
p 199
p 200
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L E S S O N 1
Be Going To 
Comparative Forms: Superiority 
Giving Opinion 
Modal Verbs: Review 
L E S S O N 2 
Comparative Forms: Equality and Inferiority 
Connectors: Addition, Contrast, and Conclusion 
Giving Opinion: Expressing Certainty and Doubt 
Will vs. Be Going To 
L E S S O N 3
Connectors: Cause and Effect 
Narrative Timeline 
Pronouns: Review and Ambiguity 
Superlative Forms 
L E S S O N 4
Advice Giving: Had Better 
Connectors: Exemplication and Listing 
Modal Expressions: Be Able To, Be Willing To, 
Be Supposed To 
Modal Verb: Would 
R E V I E W
Giving Opinion With Comparatives 
and Superlatives 
L E S S O N 5
Comparative and Superlative Forms: Review 
Expressions With Get and Feel 
Modal Expressions 
Relative Pronouns 
Tag Questions 
L E S S O N 6
Connectors: Review 
Simple Present and Present Continuous for Future 
Would Rather and Other Ways to Express Preference 
Modal Verbs and Modal Expressions: Review 
p 204
p 205
p 206
p 207
p 209
p 210
p 212
p 214
p 215
p 217
p 219
p 220
p 222
p 225
p 227
p 229
p 230
p 232
p 233
p 234
p 236
p 239
p 240
p 242
p 244
p 245
INTERMEDIATE2
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
INTERMEDIATE3
L E S S O N 1
Basic Reporting Strategies 
Giving Good and Bad News 
Present Perfect, Since and For 
Verbs Followed by Gerund or Infinitive 
L E S S O N 2
Argumentative Strategies: Quotations and Other Sources 
Comparative Forms Review and Non-gradable Adjectives 
Present Perfect: Yet, Never, Always, Ever, and Already 
Verbs Followed by Gerund and Infinitive With No Change in Meaning 
L E S S O N 3
Argumentative and Advice-giving Strategies 
Explaining Procedures: Expressing Sequence 
Present Perfect Continuous 
Verbs Followed by Gerund and Infinitive With Change in Meaning 
L E S S O N 4
Explaining Procedures: Reminders 
Paired Conjunctions: Either Or… and Neither Nor… 
Present Perfect Continuous vs. Present Perfect vs. Simple Past 
Would you mind...? 
R E V I E W
How to Give Your Opinion Using a 
Strategy Framework: Discourse with Present Perfect 
L E S S O N 5
Adverbs 
Zero and First Conditionals 
Paired Conjunctions: Not Only… But Also / Both… And 
Relative Pronouns: Review + Whose 
Tag Questions Review and Other Ways to Confirm Statements 
L E S S O N 6
Gerund and Infinitive Clauses 
Second Conditional 
Modal Verbs Review and Shall and Ought To 
Paired Conjunctions: Review 
p 248
p 249
p 250
p 251
p 253
p 256
p 259
p 261
p 263
p 265
p 267
p 268
p 271
p 272
p 274
p 276
p 278
p 280
p 283
p 284
p 286
p 289
p 291
p 294
p 296
p 298
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L E S S O N 1
Argumentative Strategies: Review 
Past Perfect 
Talking About the Future 
Verbs Followed by Gerund and Infinitive 
L E S S O N 2
Making a Definition: Subtle or Emphatic 
Must, Must Be, Must + Perfect Infinitive 
Past Perfect Continuous 
Past Perfect vs. Present Perfect 
L E S S O N 3
Connectors: Conditions 
Explaining Procedures: Asking for Clarification 
Modals + Perfect Infinitive: Should 
Passive Voice 
L E S S O N 4
Connectors: Exemplification + Cause and Effect 
Explaining Procedures: Review 
Passive Voice 
Pronoun Ambiguity 
R E V I E W
Explaining How to Do Things 
L E S S O N 5
Adverbs 
Be Going To (Past) 
Third Conditional 
Paired Conjunctions: Review 
Relative Pronouns: Whom, When, Where 
L E S S O N 6
Connectors: Review 
Conditionals: Review 
Perfect Forms: Review 
Reported Speech: Introduction 
p 302
p 303
p 305
p 307
p 310
p 311
p 314
p 316
p 318
p 320
p 321
p 322
p 324
p 326
p 328
p 331
p 333
p 335
p 338
p 339
p 341
p 344
p 346
p 350
p 352
p 355
ADVANCED 1
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 134
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L E S S O N 1
Future Perfect 
Making a Definition 
Paraphrasing 
Talking About the Future: Review 
L E S S O N 2
Making a Definition: Subtle or Emphatic 
Modals + Perfect Infinitives Review: Must and Should 
Perfect Forms: Review 
Reported Speech: Focus on Verb Forms 
L E S S O N 3
Making Metaphorical Definitions 
Modals + Perfect Infinitives: May and Might 
Passive Voice: Review 
Reported Speech: Reporting Questions 
L E S S O N 4
Implied Meaning: Proverbs 
Modals + Perfect Infinitives Review: Would and Could 
Reported Speech: Reporting Imperatives 
Reported Speech: Focus on Time and Pronoun Reference 
R E V I E W
How to Describe, Explain, Defend, 
and Analyze an Idea: Defining Basic Concepts 
L E S S O N 5
Be Going To (Present and Past) 
Conditionals: Review 
Implied Meaning: Jokes 
Relative Pronouns: Review 
Stress and Meaning 
L E S S O N 6
Cultural Aspects of Communication 
English as a Lingua Franca 
Implied Meaning: Stress and Intonation 
Reported Speech: Review 
p 358
p 359
p 361
p 362
p 365
p 366
p 368
p 371
p 373
p 374
p 376
p 378
p 380
p 382
p 384
p 386
p 388
p 391
p 392
p 394
p 396
p 398
p 400
p 402
p 403
p 405
ADVANCED2
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
18
BASIC 1
L E S S O N 1
ADJECTIVES
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
Adjectives → Descriptions → Characteristics
Physical Characteristics
Personality Traits
Sentence Construction
Subject + Verb To Be + Adjective → Liam is handsome.
Subject + Verb To Be + A/An + Adjective + Noun → Liam is a handsome man.
Physical Characteristics 
F AT C H U B B Y T H I N
V S .
S H O R T V S . TA L L H A N D S O M E / B E A U T I F U L 
( m a s c u l i n e / f e m i n i n e )
U G LY/ H O R R I B L E
S T R O N G W E A K AT H L E T I C
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
19
INDEFINITE ARTICLES
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
Talking About a New Co-worker
Phil – Hey, Alex, do you know the new accountant?
Alex – Oh yeah, Mary. She is a very beautiful girl. 
Phil – She is! She is shy, too, right?
Alex – Yes, but just say “hi” to her and you will start a conversation.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
I N C O R R E C T
Tony is a man weird.
Sheila is a thin.
C O R R E C T
Tony is a weird man. 
Sheila is thin.
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
INDEFINITE 
ARTICLES 
Only with 
singular nouns 
Nick is a doctor. 
(Nick is one person.)
Sarah is an English teacher.
(Sarah is one person.)
A
AN
O U T G O I N G / E X T R O V E R T S H Y/ T I M I D
Personality Traits
O R G A N I Z E D / N E AT D I S O R G A N I Z E D / M E S S Y
A R R O G A N T/ P R O U DW E I R D / S T R A N G EN O R M A L / O R D I N A R Y H U M B L E / M O D E S T
V S . V S .
V S . V S .
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
20
L E S S O N 1
BASIC 1
INDEFINITE 
ARTICLES 
Before consonant sounds
Before vowel sounds
A
AN
Mike has a car. 
(C = consonant sound)
Laura is an organized student. 
(O = vowel sound)
an apple (= one apple) 
Is it a specific apple, a specific banana? No. It refers to an unspecified fruit from the lot. 
an orange (= one orange) 
a banana (= one banana) 
The client wants: 
An apple, an orange, 
and a banana, please.
Thank you!
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
21
• In English some letters may sound like a consonant or like a vowel in different words. 
Nick and Sarah are students. → Plural, so no indefinite article is used.
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
Rainy Day 
Kate – Oh my God, it’s raining! 
Stu – Do you have an umbrella with you? 
Kate – No.
Stu – Come with me then. 
At Work 
Paul – Michael, what time is the meeting?
Michael – It’s starts in an hour. 
Paul – Oh, OK! Thanks.
Important:
Letter U 
Umbrella → Carol has an umbrella. (The U is pronounced 
as a vowel.) 
Uniform → I use a uniform at work. (The U is pronounced 
as a /y/ like in the word “you,” so it starts with 
a consonant sound.)
Letter H 
Honest → He is an honest man. (The H is not pronounced, 
so it starts with a vowel sound.)
Hotel → The Atlas is a hotel in Milan. (The H is pronounced, 
so it starts with a consonant sound.)
:: COMMON MISTAKES
I N C O R R E C T
I’m enginner.
Marcy and Robert are a friends.
I live in an house.
Please, an ripe orange.
I study at an university.
C O R R E C T
I’m an enginner.
Marcy and Robert are friends.
I live in a house.
Please, a ripe orange. / Please, an orange.
I study at a university.
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
22
L E S S O N 1
BASIC 1
Hi! 
Hello!
Farewells → used to end conversations
Bye! 
Goodbye! 
Take care.
Good night. 
See you later!
See you tomorrow! 
Greetings → used to start conversations
GREETINGS AND FAREWELLS
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
Good morning. Good afternoon. Good evening. 
Hi, Mary! 
How are you? Hello, Lucy! 
Great to see 
you! I’m fine. 
How are you?
Good 
night, Kim. 
Take care! I’ve got to 
go now. Bye!
Hello!
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
éde
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
23
VERB TO BE 
I am Julia. 
My name is Mario. 
This is Jessica. 
Where are you?
I am at home now.
Tokyo is in Japan.
I am happy.
Zoey is fine.
John is exhausted.
Lia and Tim are tall.
Tanya is pretty.
Leo is smart.
Introductions
Location (Permanent 
or Temporary) 
Feelings (Permanent 
or Temporary) 
Descriptions 
(People and Places)
VERB TO BE + SUBJECT PRONOUNS
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
Let’s check the use of the verb to be with subject pronouns. 
I
It
They
You
We
You
She He
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
24
L E S S O N 1
BASIC 1
L E S S O N 2
Affirmative 
I am/I’m a teacher. 
You are/You’re a student.
He is/He’s an actor. 
She is/She’s a model. 
It is/It’s cold. 
We are/We’re humans. 
You are/You’re students.
They are/They’re happy.
Negative 
I am not/I’m not Scottish. 
You are not/You aren’t here. 
He is not/He isn’t sick. 
She is not/She isn’t cold. 
It is not/It isn’t in Brazil. 
We are not/We aren’t Irish. 
You are not/You aren’t OK.
They are not/They aren’t sad.
Interrogative 
Am I in London?
Are you a teacher?
Is Zico/Is he a soccer star?
Is Madonna/Is she American? 
Is Paris/Is it in France? 
Are we friends?
Are you ready for the exam?
Are they married?
:: COMMON MISTAKES
I N C O R R E C T
I be happy.
She don’t be a doctor.
He not is in New York.
He is my friend?
C O R R E C T
I am happy.
She isn’t a doctor.
He is not in New York.
Is he my friend?
DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
These are English books. (close)
Those are my bikes. (distant)
This is Mark. (close)
That is my sister. (distant)
Singular
This: you → 
That: you 
Plural
These: you → 
Those: you 
Demonstrative Pronouns
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
25
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
At a Birthday Party At the Bakery
Danny – Hi, Lily! Happy birthday! 
This is for you… 
Lily – Oh, thanks, Danny! 
What’s this? 
Danny – Oh, c’mon, open it! It’s 
a surprise!
Mary – Good morning. 
This cake here, please.
Clerk – Sure. Anything else? 
Mary – And…that brownie over 
there. 
Clerk – Here it is, ma’am. 
Mary – Thank you.
Looking at the View
Mike – Wow…Look, we can see 
the beach from here… 
Lia – Really? Where? 
Mike – Look in that direction… 
See that tree? 
Lia – Oh, yeah! Wow!
QUESTION WORDS: WHO AND WHAT
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
Who → Questions about people
Who + Is/Are + Subject Pronouns? 
Who are you? I am Peter. 
Who is he? He is John.
Who is she? She is Sheila. 
Who are they? They are Josh and Barry.
What → Questions about objects and things in general
What + Is/Are + Demonstrative Pronouns? 
What’s that?
That is a chair.
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
26
L E S S O N 2
BASIC 1
What’s that?
That’s a computer. 
What are these?
These are pencils.
What are those?
Those are toys.
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
I am Erika,
the receptionist.
This is
my office.
Thank you.
What’s this?
This is William,
the manager.
That is the
CEO’s office.
She is...
I don’t know.
Who is she?
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
27
VERB TO BE: REVIEW
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
Let’s review the verb to be in the simple present. 
Affirmative
I am Richard.
You are a bank manager.
He is a handsome man.
She is a beautiful girl. 
It is a nice day.
We are at home. 
You are single. 
They are at work. 
Negative 
I am not/I’m not tired.
You are not/aren’t sad.
He is not/isn’t tall.
She is not/isn’t crazy.
It is not/isn’t good.
We are not/aren’t students.
You are not/aren’t in NYC.
They are not/aren’t doctors.
Interrogative 
Am I OK?
Are you tired?
Is he on the beach?
Is she an architect?
Is it a cold day?
Are we friends?
Are you actors?
Are they at the gym?
Let’s see the type of personal information we can share using the verb to be. 
Location (Temporary or Permanent): 
Mary is at school. 
Age: I am 34 years old. 
Feeling (Temporary or Permanent): 
Tony is excited about his results.
Description: Jack is athletic. 
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
28
L E S S O N 2
BASIC 1
Marital Status: Carol is married and Tim is single.Profession: Mitchell and Stephanie are lawyers.
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
:: STAY ALERT
In a Meeting with a New Client
I’m not a teacher. → informal or speaking
I am not a teacher. → formal, emphatic, or writing
:: COMMON MISTAKES
I N C O R R E C T
I not am an administrator.
You are at work?
He’s is a doctor.
C O R R E C T
I am not an administrator.
Are you at work?
He is a doctor.
I’m Paul, the account 
manager. Nice to meet you.
Nice to meet you, Paul. I’m 
Ross, sales rep at 2sports. 
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
29
VERB TO HAVE
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
Verb To Have (Simple Present—Affirmative Form)
I
You
We
You
They
He
She
It
have has
Physical Description
Possession
• To have = To own, to possess → It refers to possession
I have green eyes.
Liam has a dog and a cat.
Lia has curly hair. 
Mary has two children.
Possession
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yla 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
30
L E S S O N 2
BASIC 1
• To have = To eat / To drink
We have breakfast at seven a.m. 
Sam has lunch at one p.m. 
Michael has coffee for breakfast. 
My family has dinner together on Fridays.
Affirmative and Negative Forms 
I have a dog. I do not (don’t) have a dog.
You have a dog. You do not (don’t) have a dog.
He has a dog. He does not (doesn’t) have a dog.
She has a dog. She does not (doesn’t) have a dog.
It has beautiful eyes. It does not (doesn’t) have beautiful eyes.
We have a dog. We do not (don’t) have a dog.
You have a dog. You do not (don’t) have a dog.
They have a dog. They do not (don’t) have a dog. 
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
Talking about Pets
Tom – Do you have pets?
Gina – Yes, I have a cat and two dogs. I love pets!
Physical Description 
Mike – Is your girlfriend blonde?
Otto – No, she has brown hair.
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
31
GREETINGS AND FAREWELLS
Greetings can be formal, neutral, or informal. 
• Formal Greetings → used in formal situations 
Good morning Good afternoon Good evening
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
:: STAY ALERT
I N C O R R E C T
I have twenty-five years old.
Mike have a brother.
C O R R E C T
I am twenty-five years old. 
Mike has a brother. 
• Neutral or Informal Greetings → used in neutral or in informal situations. It’s important to pay 
attention to your tone of voice in order not to sound too informal. 
Neutral Greetings: Informal Greetings: 
Hello! Hi! Hey!How are you? What’s up? How’s it going? How’s life?
Farewells can also be formal, neutral, or informal. 
• Formal Farewells → used in formal situations
Good night. 
See you + Time Expression (e.g., See you tomorrow / See you next week.)
It was a pleasure meeting you.
L E S S O N 3
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
32
L E S S O N 3
BASIC 1
:: STAY ALERT
Formality depends on the context and on the relationship between the speaker and 
the listener. For example:
• At work with a friend: use formal or neutral greetings and farewells.
• At a bar with a friend: use informal greetings and farewells.
• At a bar with your new boss: use formal or neutral greetings and farewells.
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
Child Teenager
Adult Elderly
The difference among these people is their age.
Question about age: 
How old are you?
Possible answers: 
I’m thirty-four years old. 
I’m thirty-four. 
I’m five years old.
I’m sixteen years old.
I’m thirty-two years old. We are seventy and 
sixty-eight years old.
• Neutral or Informal Farewells → used in neutral or in informal situations. It’s important to pay attention to 
your tone of voice in order not to sound too informal.
Bye. 
Bye-bye.
Goodbye. 
Take care.
See you.
See you later. 
QUESTION WORDS: HOW OLD
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
33
How old + verb to be + the person whose age you want to know?
Sentence Order
How old
are you?
is Michael (he)?
is Vivian (she)?
are you and your sister (you)?
are your parents (they)?
I’m twenty-eight years old. 
He is fourteen years old.
She is forty-six years old.
I am thirty-one and my sister is eighteen.
Mom is fifty-four and dad is sixty. / They are both sixty.
Meeting People
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
:: COMMON MISTAKES
I N C O R R E C T
How many years do you have?
I have thirty years old.
C O R R E C T
How old are you?
I am thirty years old.
Life is very stressful 
nowadays. How old are you?
Hi! I’m Peter. I’m a senior 
student. Welcome to CIU. A senior, really? You look 
young. How old are you?
It’s weird, doc. I feel very 
tired every day, you know. 
VERBS TO BE, TO LIKE, TO WORK, TO LIVE, TO HAVE
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
This is the general sentence structure to use with these verbs.
Subject + Verb + Complement
Now take a look at each verb.
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
34
L E S S O N 3
BASIC 1
to work 
all day / in the morning / in the afternoon / night shifts / at night
at a company / for someone 
every day / on weekends 
to have 
a car / money / a house / children / friends / a dog / a cat
days off / vacation / a job / responsibilities / things to do / time 
breakfast / lunch / dinner / a snack / some coffee
• Verb To Have → used to indicate possession or as a synonym to verbs to eat or to drink
• Verb To Work → to do a job you are paid for
Kelly has a new car. Carla and Paula have lunch together every day.
Mary, Josh, and Jackie are doctors. 
They work at a hospital. 
to live
alone / with friends / with your parents / with your family / with your boyfriend or girlfriend
in a house / in an apartment / in a studio / in a mansion / in a cabin / in a loft
downtown / in the suburbs / in the countryside / in the city / abroad
Jack and Valerie live together. 
• Verb To Live → used to indicate where your home is and who you live with
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
35
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
Buy a Car
Hugo – Do you have a car?
Kim – Yeah…a sedan.
Hugo – Do you like it? Is it good?
Kim – It’s a nice car.
Hugo – I live far from work. I need to buy a car.
Kim – Sedans are spacious and comfortable. 
Hugo – Thanks.
:: STAY ALERT
Affirmative 
I/You/We/They
He/She/It
I/You/We/They 
He/She/It
like chocolate. 
work every day.
live in the U.S.A.
likes chocolate. 
works every day.
lives in the U.S.A.
have breakfast in the morning. 
has breakfast in the morning.
Negative
I/You/We/They
He/She/It
I/You/We/They 
He/She/It
don’t like chocolate. 
don’t work every day.
don’t live in the U.S.A.
doesn’t like chocolate. 
doesn’t work every day. 
doesn’t live in the U.S.A. 
don’t have breakfast in the morning. 
doesn’t have breakfast in the morning.
to be
(states / 
characteristics)
to be 
(location)
beautiful / handsome / ugly / smart / dumb /responsible / irresponsible / correct / 
incorrect / polite / impolite / excited about / interested in
happy / sad / angry / stressed / calm / hungry / thirsty
at work / in Paris / (at) home / in a good place / here / there
with your family / with your friends
• Verb To Be → Used to indicate states, characteristics, and location
Lena is sleepy. Albert is at the gym.
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
36
L E S S O N 3
BASIC 1
• Your brother and your sister are your siblings.
• Your mother and your father are your parents. 
• You and your siblings are your parents’ children.
• Your grandmother and your grandfather are your 
grandparents.
• Family Members
• Pets 
Do you have pets? Take a look at some types of pets you can have:
P U P P Y ( B A B Y D O G ) D O GK I T T E N ( B A B Y C AT ) 
You use numbers to:
• Say your age → I am twelve years old.
• Talk about your family → I have two sisters. 
• Talk about your pets → I have one dog and three cats. 
• Talk about quantity in general → I live with four people in my house.
CARDINAL NUMBERS, FAMILY MEMBERS, AND PETS
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
Here are the numbers from 1 to 12
1 – one
2 – two
3 – three
4 – four
5 – five
6 – six
7 – seven
8 – eight
 9 – nine
10 – ten
11 – eleven
12 – twelve
• Numbers 
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
37
B I R D 
H A M S T E RI G U A N A
S N A K E
F I S H 
R A B B I T 
C AT
F E R R E T
P I G
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
:: COMMON MISTAKES
I N C O R R E C T
I have parents in New York.
My brothers’ names are Mary and John.
C O R R E C T
I have relatives in New York.
My siblings’ names are Mary and John.
Jerry – So, Ted...Is it true you live with your grandparents on a farm?
Ted – Yes! My parents work in the city, but I live there with my 
grandparents and with my sister. 
Jerry – Cool! Do you have pets there? 
Ted – Yes! We have ten pets: two dogs, one cat, two birds, three 
piglets, one hamster, and one ferret. 
Jerry – Oh, wow! Is it difficult to take care of them?
Ted – It is, but they are great! I love my pets. 
Talking About Your Home Life
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
38
L E S S O N 4
BASIC 1
:: STAY ALERT
Anna – What’s your address? 
Paul – (It's) 12 Kimberly Avenue. 
 I live at 12 Kimberly Avenue. 
 My address is 12 Kimberly Avenue. 
three possible answers
ADJECTIVES TO DESCRIBE PLACES
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
Adjectives → Descriptions → Characteristics 
Subject + Verb To Be + Adjective → The Empire State is tall. 
Subject + Verb To Be + A/An + Adjective + Noun → The Empire State is a tall building.
Subject + Verb + Preposition + A/An + Adjective + Noun → Tony lives in a modern house. 
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
ADDRESSES
Questions About Address
What’s your address?
Where do you live?
Answers About Address
My address is 45 Lily Road.
I live at 45 Lily Road.
I live on Lily Road.
I live in New Jersey.
Complete Addresses
Sentence Construction
I live at + Number + Street Name + Apartment or Other Complements
Street Name
I live on + Street Name
For Neighborhood, City, 
Village, Continent, or Country
I live in + Name of the Place
I live at 98 Smith Street Flat B. 
I live in
Copacabana.
New York City.
Australia.
Europe.
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
39
Take a look at some adjectives:
N E W O L D D I R T Y C L E A N 
D I S TA N TN O I S YQ U I E T C L O S E
C L A S S I C M E S S Y M O D E R NO R G A N I Z E D
S I M P L EF A M O U S E L E G A N T U N K N O W N
V S .
V S .
V S .
V S .
H O R R I B L E / U G LY F A N TA S T I C / M A R V E L O U S
V S .
V S .
V S .
V S .
V S .
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
40
L E S S O N 4
BASIC 1
:: COMMON MISTAKES
I N C O R R E C T
Steve lives in a house beautiful.
Paris is a wonderful.
C O R R E C T
Steve lives in a beautiful house.
Paris is wonderful.
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
At a Café 
Anne – Do you like this place? It is so ugly. 
Paula – It’s OK. It’s a friendly place and the food is fantastic.
Anne – Yeah...maybe. But look at the decoration. It is so boring! 
Paula – You sound boring right now. Just drink your coffee, come on.
At the Shopping Mall
Angela – Stacy, there are so many people here. It is so busy today! 
Stacy – It is! It’s horrible. I like to shop at quiet places.
Angela – I like it too but staying home is tedious. Let’s walk around.
The desk is near the window. 
The door is far from the window.
The computer is on the desk. 
The trash bin is under the desk. 
The book is between the computer and the pencil holder. 
The colored pencils are in the pencil holder. 
The picture frame is behind the pencil holder. 
The chair is in front of the desk. 
The teddy bear is among the magazines in the basket.
PREPOSITIONS OF TIME AND PLACE
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
When talking about the city, you can use different prepositions of place.
Street → Jackson Bank is on Marks Street.
City → The Sugar Loaf is in Rio de Janeiro. 
Neighborhood → There are many restaurants in Hell’s Kitchen.
Country → Bangkok is in Thailand.
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
41
• At is used with specific place or places where 
people work or study.
Dad is at home.
Liam is at work.
Tina works at Sears. 
Michael studies at Lawrence High.
• At is also used with complete addresses. 
Kim lives at 24 William Alley.
• Now pay attention to this: Where do you work? 
I work at Many Corp. Many Corp is in New 
Jersey, on Quarter Street. 
Prepositions of Time
What time does the plane depart?
When is the flight?
The flight leaves at nine a.m.
The flightis on July 7th, 2017.
The flight is in July.
At → It refers to specific time
In → Used with months, parts of the day, 
and also with seasons of the year
Tim works out in the morning. 
Christmas is in December. 
The flowers blossom in the spring. 
On → Used with days of the week and specific dates
Christmas is on December 25th.
Our English classes are on Tuesdays and Thursdays.
I have classes at ten a.m. We have lunch at twelve p.m. Meet me at six p.m. 
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
42
L E S S O N 4
BASIC 1
We say in the morning, in the afternoon, 
in the evening, but we say at night.
:: STAY ALERT
:: COMMON MISTAKES
I N C O R R E C T
The baby likes to sit among mom and dad.
I like to be between people, not alone.
I always stay with my family in Christmas.
C O R R E C T
The baby likes to sit between mom and dad.
I like to be among people, not alone.
I always stay with my family at Christmas.
QUESTION WORDS: WHERE AND WHEN
Where Place and Location 
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
Other examples:
Where is your mom’s house?
Where is your sister?
Where are you?
Where is London?
It is in Chelsea.
She is at work. 
I’m at school. 
London is in England.
Other examples:
Where do you live? 
Where do you work?
Where do you go to school?
Where do you study English?
I live in Tokyo. 
I work in WKC Computers. 
I go to school at St. Martin’s. 
I study English at Wise Up.
• Where + Verb To Be + Complement
• Where + Do You + Verb + Complement
Hi! I’m Rick, from
Nigeria. Where 
are you from?
I work at WKC
Computers.
And you?Where do
you work?
I’m from Japan.
Nice to meet you.
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
43
Other examples:
When are your English classes? 
When is your birthday?
When is the party?
My English Classes are 
on Mondays and Wednesdays.
My birthday is on September 4th.
The party is tomorrow afternoon. 
• When + Verb To Be + Complement 
Other examples:
When do you go to the gym? 
When do you travel?
When do you see your 
boyfriend?
I go to the gym every day 
in the morning.
I travel on my vacations.
I see my boyfriend on 
weekends.
• When + Do You + Verb + Complement
Questions with When Possible Answers 
 It’s in July.
We use in for seasons (in the summer), months (in August), years 
(in 1973), and parts of the day (in the morning).
 It’s on July 10th.
We use on for days of the week (on Monday) and for dates 
(on January 2nd).
 It’s at six p.m.
We use at for specific time (at midnight, at seven a.m.).
• When is your party?
When Time 
I N C O R R E C T
When do you make anniversary?
Where is your job?
Where we are?
Where you live? 
C O R R E C T
When is your birthday?
Where do you work?
Where are we?
Where do you live?
We use at to refer to specific moments of the year, such as: at Christmas.
:: STAY ALERT
:: COMMON MISTAKES
My birthday
is on June 8th.
When is your 
birthday?
When do you
have classes
at Wise Up?
I have classes at
Wise Up on Mondays
and Wednesdays.
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
44
BASIC 1
HOW TO MAKE A PERSONAL PRESENTATION
R E V I E W
If you want, you can 
put some of this 
information together. 
Subject + Verb To Be + A/An + Age (X-year-old) + Nationality + Profession
To make a personal presentation, you say:
• Your name → I am... / My name is... 
• Your age → I am...years old. 
• Your profession → I am a/an...
• Your nationality → I am... / I am from...
• Your marital status → I am single / engaged / married / divorced / a widow / a widower.
• Where you live → I live in Amsterdam. / I live on 12th street. / I live at 98, 12th street. / I live in Brazil.
• Where you work → I work at Lunette’s. / I work downtown.
You can also talk about:
• Your possessions → I have pets. / I have a car.
• Your likes and dislikes → I like cooking. / I don’t like sports. 
How do you talk about yourself? Here is Leonard and he is going to help you. 
Hi! I’m Leonard and
I’m here to help you with
personal presentations.
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
Let’s see what Leonard has to say about himself.
This is Lucy, my wife. 
She is Scottish.
I’m 32 years old and
I am from New Orleans, Louisiana.
I am a dentist and I work at
ABC Dental Care. I’m married
and I live in Cleveland with my wife.
I’m a veterinarian and 
I love to walk my little dog 
in the morning. We have a 
dog, a cat, and a bird.
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
45
In which situations do we make personal presentations? 
Jack – Excuse me, hi. I’m Jack. 
Kelly – Oh, hi, Jack! I’m Kelly, nice to meet you.
Jack – Nice to meet you, too. So, tell me about yourself, Kelly.
Kelly – Well, I’m twenty-three years old...I am a law student from Albuquerque.
Jack – New Mexico? Interesting! I’m from Santa Fe.
Kelly – What a coincidence! So, tell me about yourself now. 
Jack – I’m a twenty-nine-year-old accountant at Max Computers, I’m from Santa Fe, and I love dogs. 
Kelly – Oh, no...I’m a cat person.
Jack – But do you hate dogs? 
Kelly – No, dogs are OK. But I just love cats. 
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
Personal Presentations
Meeting People
Job Interviews
Introducing Yourself
Take a look!
Hi! I’m Leonard. I’m a 32-year-old 
American dentist. This is Lucy. 
She is a 28-year-old Scottish 
veterinarian. We’re married and 
we live in Cleveland. We have a 
dog, a cat, and a bird.
Meeting People
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
46
BASIC 1
R E V I E W
I N C O R R E C T
I am a Mary.
I have forty years old.
I live at England.
I am doctor.
I am a architect.
I not like vegetables.
I’m from Brazilian.
C O R R E C T
I am Mary.
I am forty years old.
I live in England.
I am a doctor.
I am an architect.
I don’t like vegetables.
I’m from Brazil / I’m Brazilian.
Job Interview
Introducing Yourself 
Mr. Fox – Alex Swanson? Please, take a seat.
Alex – Hello, sir. Thank you. 
Mr. Fox – So...Mr. Swanson...I see in your résumé that you are an engineer.
Alex – Yes, sir. 
Mr. Fox – So, tell me more about yourself. 
Alex – Well, I’m twenty-five years old. I’m from Sweden butI have been living in St. Louis for a long time. 
Mr. Fox – Oh, interesting. 
Alex – I am engaged, but we haven’t set a date for the wedding yet.
Mr. Fox – Nice. Do you have hobbies?
Alex – I love music. I listen to jazz and play the saxophone.
Mrs. Bergman – Good afternoon, ladies and gentleman. Let me introduce myself. My name is Sandra 
Bergman and I’m a Dutch historian. I live in the beautiful city of Amsterdam and, as you 
can imagine, I love to ride my bicycle and to drink my beer. I am fifty-five years old and 
I have been married to my Walter Bergman for thirty years. We have three children and 
two grandchildren. I am here to talk to you about the Amsterdam lifestyle. Let’s begin?
:: COMMON MISTAKES
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
47
L E S S O N 5
ARTICLES: DEFINITE AND INDEFINITE
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
Indefinite Articles → Used with singular nouns
A – Before consonant sounds
An – Before vowel sounds
Rick is an elegant actor. That’s a fast car. An apple a day keeps
the doctor away.
A cup of coffee, please?
Definite Article → The → it refers to a particular thing or person that has already been mentioned, is already 
known, or is the only one
Don – Which car do you like? 
Mark – I like the red car. 
(Don and Mark know which car it is.)
Quinn – Pasta is the most delicious food in the 
world. (There is only one world, and, for 
Quinn, one delicious food.)
• Use: a particular/specific thing that is known 
by the people in the conversation 
Don’t use the definite article the:
• Before proper names: The Mary is my boss. 
• Before names of countries: The Canada is a nice country.
• Exceptions: the United States, the United Kingdom, the Philippines.
• Use: to refer to unique things, it is the only one
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
48
L E S S O N 5
BASIC 1
One Day Before Sarah’s Birthday Party
I have to buy a present for Sarah. (a 
blouse, a book, make-up, an item I can 
choose in the shopping mall)
On the Day of Sarah’s Birthday Party
Does Sarah like the present? (the specific 
present, the one I gave her)
At the Restaurant:
Jack – Darling, look at the menu and choose a pizza topping. 
(Mozzarella, pepperoni, vegetarian? Pick any topping.)
Mia – Hmm, I want the pepperoni pizza. 
(one specific type of pizza) 
After Eating
Jack – So, honey, did you like the pizza? (the pepperoni pizza.)
Let’s compare indefinite and definite articles?
I N C O R R E C T
My profession? I’m the computer analyst.
I want to have the car but I don’t have any money.
Mike is going to the England.
Nick is married to the Julia.
C O R R E C T
My profession? I’m a computer analyst.
I want to have a car but I don’t have any money.
Mike is going to England.
Nick is married to Julia.
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
Will – Oh, what a lovely picture! Who is your husband? 
Anna – The man on the right, with the boy. 
:: COMMON MISTAKES
CONNECTORS: AND, BUT, AND SO
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
And → to add information, to connect complementary ideas
I like apples and chocolate.
I like apples.
I like chocolate. O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
49
Fact: When you are sick, you don’t go to work.
So → To introduce a conclusion 
Julia is sick, so she is not going to work. 
Fact: Volleyball players are usually tall. Nick is 160 cm. 
Nick is a professional volleyball player. 
But → to connect opposing ideas
Nick is short, but he is a volleyball player. 
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
John – Pam, do you want to have dinner and watch 
Blood and Fire with me?
Pam – Oh, I’m OK for dinner, but I hate horror movies.
John – So we can watch another movie. Do you like 
adventure movies?
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
50
L E S S O N 5
BASIC 1
I N C O R R E C T
I like math. And I like history.
I woke up late, I didn’t have breakfast so.
C O R R E C T
I like math and history.
I woke up late, so I didn’t have breakfast.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
IMPERATIVES
IMPERATIVES
Instructions/Directions RequestsOrders
Stop! Turn right. Be quiet, please.
Affirmative
Verb in the Bare Infinitive Form 
Pay attention.
Open the door.
Come here.
Sit down.
Listen to me.
Negative
Don’t + Verb in the Bare Infinitive Form
Don’t pay attention.
Don’t open the door.
Don’t come here.
Don’t sit down.
Don’t listen to me.
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
51
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
Mr. Pax – Gabe, close the door behind you, please. 
Gabe – Sure. 
Mr. Pax – OK, guys, tell me about the problems in the department. 
Gabe – Please, sir, don’t ask me about the problems. I want to propose a solution. 
Mr. Pax – Then, present this solution, Gabe.
In a Meeting 
Mrs. Smith – Please, open the General Law Guide to page 54. 
Gavin – Sorry, ma’am. I don’t understand. Repeat the page, please? 
Mrs. Smith – Sure. It’s page 54. 
Gavin – Thank you.
Mrs. Smith – Gavin, help me with the review. Tell me one of the principles of Family Law. 
In the Classroom 
:: STAY ALERT
Do not enter.
Don’t enter. 
Formal and/or emphatic
Informal and/or neutral 
I N C O R R E C T
Don’t to go now.
C O R R E C T
Don’t go now.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
52
L E S S O N 5
BASIC 1
I N C O R R E C T
I enjoy to watch TV.
I like study English.
C O R R E C T
I enjoy watching TV.
I like to study English. / I like studying English.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
 Things
I like... I like chocolate/ice cream. 
I enjoy… I enjoy the sun/TV series. 
I love... I love juice/my friends/pets. 
I adore... I adore books/movies/my family. 
Actions
Ilike to work. / I like going to the beach.
I enjoy watching TV.
I love going out with my friends.
I adore traveling to the mountains.
 Things 
I don't like... I don’t like papaya/milk.
I dislike… I dislike salad/spicy food.
I hate... I hate mango/rude people.
I detest... I detest onions/horror movies.
Actions
I don’t like to wake up / waking up early.
I dislike to work / working on weekends.
I hate to wake up / waking up early.
I detest driving at rush hour.
LIKES AND DISLIKES
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
When you talk about things you like or about actions you like to do, you can say:
When you talk about things you don’t like or about actions you don't like to do, you can say: 
Dislike < Hate < Detest
 + ++
I love this movie!
Let’s have
the salmon?
I hate fish, man. 
I’ll have the chicken.
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
53
EXPRESSING POSSESSION: POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
Subject Pronoun
I
You
He
She
It
We
You
They
Possessive Adjective
My
Your
His
Her
Its
Our
Your
Their
Sentence Order
(Possessive Adjective + Noun) + Verb + Complement → My husband works at a bank.
Subject + Verb + (Possessive Adjective + Noun) → This is our taxi. 
Troy – Hi, my name is Troy. What is your name? 
Amy – Hi, Troy. Nice to meet you. My name is Amy. 
Troy – And what is her name? 
Amy – Oh, sorry. This is my cousin, her name is Julia. 
Mary – Hello, Mary speaking. 
Tim – Hi, Mary. It’s Tim. Is your father at home?
Mary – No, mom and dad are at the garage to fix 
their car.
Tim – Oh, OK. Please, tell him that Kim is back 
and that our new number is 8764-3579.
Mary – Sure. See you.
Meeting People On the Phone
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
:: COMMON MISTAKES
I N C O R R E C T
The my car is black.
That is not your car, that is my.
Are they yours brothers?
C O R R E C T
My car is black.
That is not your car; that is my car.
Are they your brothers?
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
54
L E S S O N 6
BASIC 1
:: STAY ALERT
Imperative might sound rude or inappropriate depending on context. If you really want to 
make sure you are making a request or asking for a favor and not giving a command 
when you use imperatives forms, use the word please and use proper intonation.
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
IMPERATIVES
IMPERATIVES
Instructions/Directions RequestsOrders
Structure:
Affirmative → Verb in the Bare Infinitive Form + Complement → Talk to me. / Go!
Negative → Don’t + Verb in the Bare Infinitive Form + Complement → Don’t speak. / Don’t go there.
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
Fasten your seatbelts.
Here it is. Help yourself. 
Calm down! Don’t panic.
Have a seat, please. Pass me the salad, please. 
• You can use imperatives for requests and for favors:
Please, call tomorrow! (request or favor)
Please, help John with his homework. (request or favor)
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
55
Things Activities People Place LocationTime
QUESTION WORDS REVIEW
What Who When Where
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
Sentence Order in Questions with the Verb To Be Sentence Order with Other Verbs 
Where
What 
When
Who 
Where
What 
When
Who 
+ Verb To Be + Complement? + Do You + Verb + Complement?
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
Registering at the Gym
Clerk – Welcome to Wellness Gym.
Mel – Hi! I want to register, please. 
Clerk – Sure...let’s complete this 
form. What is your full name?
Mel – It’s Melanie Johnson.
Clerk – OK...and where do you live? 
Mel – I live at 565 Stuart Street. 
Clerk – OK...When is your birthday? 
Mel – It’s on August 15th. 
Clerk – Wonderful, Melanie. It costs 
fifty dollars a month. 
Mel – Great. Here it is.
First Day at Work
Lara – Excuse me. Hi! I’m Lara. It’s my first day here.
Chris – Oh, hi, Lara! Welcome to Officers. I’m Chris.
Lara – Nice to meet you, Chris. Look, where is my 
station? 
Chris – I don’t know. You have to ask Timothy. 
Lara – OK. But...who’s Timothy?
Chris – He is the office manager. Tall guy, brown hair, 
brown eyes…
Lara – That’s twenty-five percent of the world, girl. 
Chris – You’re right. What do you do here? 
Lara – I’m a sales representative. 
Chris – Hum, OK. So, go to Mr. Strong’s office and he 
will help you. 
Lara – Thanks! Where is his office? 
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
56
L E S S O N 6
BASIC 1
I N C O R R E C T
What is your date of anniversary?
Where you live?
What you do?
C O R R E C T
When is you birthday / anniversary?
Where do you live?
What do you do?
:: COMMON MISTAKES
What? = Non-literal, indicates surprise
:: STAY ALERT
Some questions are commonly used in certain situations. Take a look:
Who is it? = Responding to a knock 
on your door
What?!
Who is it?
Who is it? = Picking up the phone 
Hello, who is it?
Hi Mom! 
It’s me, John
It’s twelve o’clock. 
It’s nine twenty-eight. 
It’s seven o’clock. 
It’s ten oh nine. 
We use the following structures to express time:
• Full Hour → It’s + Hour + O’clock
• Hour and Minutes → It’s + Hour + Minutes 
EXPRESSING TIME
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
9:28 → It’s nine twenty-eight. 
10:09 → It’s ten-oh-nine. 
6:15 → It’s six fifteen. / It’s a quarter past six. 
10:30 → It’s ten thirty. / It’s half past ten. 
10:50 → It’s ten fifty. / It’s ten to eleven. 
11:55 → It’s eleven fifty-five. / It’s five to twelve.
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
57
QUESTION WORD: WHAT TIME
I N C O R R E C T
I have lunch at 12 a.m.
I go to work at seven hours.
C O R R E C T
I have lunch at twelve p.m. (at noon)
I go to work at seven o’clock.
I go to work at seven a.m.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
:: STAY ALERT
a.m. → from midnight to 11:59 (in the morning)
p.m. → from noon to 11:59 (in the evening)
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
What time...? → Exact Time 
• What Time + Do/Does + Subject + Verb + Complement 
Amy – What time do you go to work? 
Joe – I go to work at seven thirty a.m. 
• What Time + Verb To Be + Complement
Anna – What time is your English Class? 
Paul – My English Class is at eight a.m. 
Sentence Order
O
 m
at
eria
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
58
L E S S O N 6
BASIC 1
NOTES
Waking Someone Up
Mia – Hi, Jake. Do you want to come to my 
birthday party on Saturday at my house? 
Jake – Cool! What time? 
Mia – At seven p.m. 
Jake – Wonderful! See you then. 
Jane – Jimmy, wake up! You’re late. 
Jimmy – Late? What time is it? 
Jane – It’s nine a.m. Come on!
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
I N C O R R E C T
 What is the time now? 
What hour do you wake up?
C O R R E C T
What time is it?
What time do you wake up?
Inviting a Friend for Party 
:: COMMON MISTAKES
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
60
BASIC 2
L E S S O N 1
ARTICLES: DEFINITE, INDEFINITE, AND ZERO
Let’s start by reviewing the definite and indefinite articles.
The Claudia is a nice girl. 
Carl loves the United States. OK! 
Indefinite Article A Indefinite Article An Definite Article The
singular
plural 
before vowel sounds
before consonant sounds
specific nouns
general nouns
yes
no
no
yes
no
yes
yes
no
yes
no
no
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
no
Remember that we don’t usually use the before proper nouns. 
There are some exceptions.
Zero Article
We don’t use articles:
• before possessives
This is my car. (no article before my)
Tommy’s girlfriend is gorgeous. (no article before Tommy’s)
• with nouns in unlimited numbers
Everybody loves chocolate. 
(unlimited number/quantity of chocolate)
Mary plants flowers. (unlimited number of flowers) 
Stewart collects books. (unlimited number of books) 
• before general nouns in the plural and uncountable nouns
Dogs are man's best friend. (dogs in general)
Oxygen is important for life. (oxygen = uncountable noun)
Diana teaches children. (children in general)
Tanya has homework to do. (homework = uncountable noun)
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
This is a group of pens.
Pens are used for writing. 
(pens in general)
The fountain pen is used in 
calligraphy. (this specific type of pen)
This is a fountain pen. 
(It is one type of pen.)
Take a look at the difference between definite, indefinite, and zero article. 
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
61
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
:: COMMON MISTAKES
GREETINGS AND FAREWELLS
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
use a Greeting to start conversations use a Farewell to finish conversations
Jackson – Honey, let’s have a pet? 
Wendy – OK...but which pet do you want? 
Jackson – I don’t know. A cat? A dog? A bird?
Wendy – Darling, I know you like animals in general, 
but you need to decide. 
Jackson – You’re right. Let’s get a dog! 
Wendy – Let’s get a dog then!
Kelly – Mom, pass me the salt, please? 
Lyla – Sure. Here it is. Don’t you want salad? 
Kelly – I don’t really like salad, mom. 
Lyla – OK. Michael, have a glass of orange juice.
Michael – Thanks, mom. What’s for dessert?
Lyla – We have fruit. You can have a banana or an apple.
Michael – An apple? Fruit is for breakfast, not for dessert. 
Lyla – You guys need healthier habits. 
I N C O R R E CT
Tony adores the his car.
The Mary is teacher.
The advice is not always good.
Eat a vegetables.
C O R R E CT
Tony adores his car.
Mary is a teacher.
Advice is not always good.
Eat vegetables.
When you arrive When you leave
Let’s have a pet!
Family Dinner
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
62
L E S S O N 1
BASIC 2
Let’s begin with Greetings and Farewells in some formal situations such as:
• Job Interviews
• Meetings with clients
• Meetings with the board of directors 
Greetings Commonly Used in Formal Conversations
Good How are you, sir? How’s your day, ma’am?
morning.
afternoon.
evening.
• Lectures and conferences 
• Conversations with older and more conservative people
• Conversations with people you don’t know
Farewells Commonly Used in Formal Conversations 
Good night. 
Goodbye.
Have a nice day.
See you + Time Expression 
(See you tomorrow / next week.)
Now let’s take a look at some neutral or informal situations.
• Casual conversations with friends
• Conversations with your family
• Conversations at informal places
• Informality (when allowed)
Greetings Commonly Used in Neutral or Informal Conversations 
Neutral or Informal 
Very Informal
Hi! Hello! 
How are you? How are things? 
How’s life? Good to see you! 
Nice to see you! Long time no see!
What’s up? How are you doing?
How’s it going? How’s everything? 
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
63
Farewells Commonly Used in Informal Conversations 
Bye. Bye-bye. See you. 
Catch you later. Take care. Night.
Leaving a Job Interview 
Mr. Patricks – OK, Jonas, thank you very much for coming. 
We’ll call you with the results. 
Jonas Henson – Thank you very much, sir. Have a good day. 
Arriving for a Job Interview 
Jonas Henson – Excuse me, good morning. I’m Jonas Henson. 
Mr. Patricks – Hello, Jonas. Please, come in and take a seat. 
How are you today, Jonas?
Jonas Henson – I’m fine, sir, thank you for asking.
Going on a Road Trip 
Mr. Marks – Pete, drive safely! Zoey, be careful with the sun! 
Zoey – OK, dad, don’t worry. Bye! 
Mr. Marks – Bye! See you next week!
:: STAY ALERT
In very informal situations, you can say:
Morning! (Good morning) Afternoon! (Good afternoon) Evening! (Good evening) Nighty night! (Good night)
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
:: COMMON MISTAKES
I N C O R R E CT
Good night! How are you?
C O R R E CT
Good evening! How are you?
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gmai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
64
BASIC 2
L E S S O N 1
PLURAL FORMS
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
Singular
End in –F or –FE
wolf
knife
life
Plural
Drop –F or –FE and + –VES
wolves
knives
lives
Singular
boy
girl
video
Plural
boys
girls
videos
Singular
Ending in Consonant + –Y
baby
candy 
city
Plural
Drop –Y + –IES
babies
candies 
cities
Singular
Ending in –SH, –CH, –S, –X or –Z
watch 
hairbrush 
bus
fox 
buzz
Plural
+ –ES
watches
hairbrushes 
buses
foxes
buzzes
Singular Plural • Normally, you add –S to form the plural:
• But there are special rules: 
Singular
Ending in Consonant + –O
potato
hero 
Plural
+ –ES
potatoes
heroes 
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
65
Singular
woman
man
child
foot
tooth 
Plural
women
men
children
feet 
teeth
Irregular Plural
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
Two Women Meet at the Park 
Marcy – Hi, Sarah! Who are these beautiful kids?
Sarah – These are my children, Leah and Mike. 
Marcy – Oh, how lovely! 
At the Farmers’ Market 
Lucy – Excuse me, sir. I'd like some potatoes. 
Seller – OK, ma’am. 
At the Police Station 
Mary – Hello, officer. Two men robbed my car.
Officer – Please, describe the men. 
Mary – Well, one of them has big teeth, blue 
eyes, and blonde hair.
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
66
L E S S O N 1
BASIC 2
SIMPLE PRESENT
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
Regular/Habitual ActionsGeneral/Permanent Facts 
The sky is blue. 
I like fruit.
My class is on Mondays.
You eat fruit every day.
Take a look at the verb to be in the simple present:
Take a look at the verb to like in the simple present:
Affirmative
I am/I’m American.
You are/You’re a doctor.
He is/He’s my brother.
She is/She’s famous.
It is/It’s a nice day.
We are/We’re friends. 
You are/You’re intelligent
They are/They’re married.
Negative
I am not/I’m not a dentist.
You are not/You aren’t a kid.
He is not/He isn’t Italian.
She is not/She’s not at home.
It is not/It isn’t hot today.
We are not/We aren’t Polish.
You are not/You aren’t well.
They are not/They aren’t here.
Interrogative
Am I correct?
Are you at work?
Is Messi (he) famous?
Is Mary (she) tired?
Is Snoopy (it) a dog?
Are we OK?
Are you at the course?
Are they together? 
Affirmative
I like chocolate.
You like rock and roll.
We like English. 
You like to play the guitar.
They like apples. 
Negative
I don’t like salsa.
You don’t like tomatoes.
We don’t like to sleep early.
You don’t like to work.
They don’t like cats.
Interrogative
Do I like to study?
Do you like lemons?
Do we like to work?
Do you like French?
Do they like soda?
Note: 
For the third person singular (he, she, and it), we use a different 
spelling or verb inflection. You will study this topic in Lesson 2. 
:: COMMON MISTAKES
I N C O R R E CT
I have to fix two tooths.
Woman are all different.
Tony and Kelly are childs.
There are two bus at the station.
C O R R E CT
I have to fix two teeth.
Women are all different.
Tony and Kelly are children.
There are two buses at the station.
Simple Present
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
67
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
Having Lunch with Friends
Pam – Hey, Mark, try the bacon. It is delicious!
Mark – I don’t like bacon. 
Pam – What? Are you insane? 
Mark – I know! I like vegetables, but I really don’t like bacon. 
Take a look at some dialogues with to be and to like in the simple present:
Bad Memory
Leo – Is today May 10th?
Joe – No, it’s May 11th. 
Leo – Oh my God! It’s my birthday. I don’t like birthdays. 
Joe – That is weird, you know? You don't like your birthday and 
don't remember when it is? 
Leo – Well, I am weird. I don’t like the idea of getting old. 
Joe – You get older every year, my friend. It is a fact. Live with it. 
:: COMMON MISTAKES
I N C O R R E CT
I not like alcoholic drinks.
You like salad?
Do you be a secretary?
I don’t am an architect.
I am like to travel.
Are you work here?
C O R R E CT
I don’t like alcoholic drinks.
Do you like salad?
Are you a secretary?
I am not an architect. / I’m not an architect.
I like to travel.
Do you work here?
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
68
L E S S O N 2
BASIC 2
L E S S O N 2
ADJECTIVES FOR PERSONAL DESCRIPTION
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
Let’s begin by reviewing the sentence structure of sentences with adjectives? 
Sentence Structure
Subject + Verb To Be + Adjective → Carly is intelligent.
Subject + Verb To Be + Complement with Adjective → Joanna is a dynamic athlete. 
Subject + Verb + Complement with Adjective → Liam likes smart girls. 
Adjectives are not used in the plural form. Take a look. 
A C T I V E P E O P L E F A S T C A R S Y O U N G G I R L S
Take a look at some adjectives used to describe people’s personality.
S W E E T 
S E X Y
R U D E 
A G G R E S S I V E
K I N D
D E P R E S S E D
P O L I T E
F U N N Y
I M P O L I T E
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
69
F R I E N D LY
S T R E S S E D
S N O B B I S H
R E S E R V E D 
C A L M
F A M O U S
D E D I C AT E D
N E R V O U S
TA L K AT I V E
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
Talking About People
Paula – So, Amy, tell me about Peter!
Amy – Oh, Paula, he is so sweet!
Paula – Really? What else?
Amy – He is very intelligent and kind. 
A real gentleman.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
I N C O R R E CT
They are aggressives boys.
Luke is a man polite.
C O R R E CT
They are aggressive boys.
Luke is a polite man.
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
70
L E S S O N 2
BASIC 2
L E S S O N 2
DEMONSTRATIVEPRONOUNS
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
Demonstrative Pronouns
Identify and Describe Things Identify and Introduce People
There are some possible sentence structures with demonstrative pronouns.
Demonstrative Pronoun + Verb + Complement 
→ That is a great house! 
Subject + Verb + Demonstrative Pronoun + 
Complement → Mark loves that girl. 
Imperative + Demonstrative Pronoun + Complement 
→ Look at this car…wow! 
That’s my sister, Rose. 
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
71
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
Introducing a New Co-worker
Akiko – Mr. Hiroshi, this is Akimi.
Akimi – Nice to meet you, Mr. Hiroshi. 
Akiko – And this is Tasha. 
Tasha – Nice to meet you, Mr. Hiroshi. 
Mr. Hiroshi – It’s a pleasure to meet you two. 
Talking to Friends
Kim – Oh my God! Those shoes are so trendy… 
Sylvia – They so are, right? I’m so in love with them… 
Kim – Now look at this yellow belt! Gorgeous, right?
Sylvia – Yeah, I love it! 
:: STAY ALERT
Demonstrative pronouns are frequently 
used in introductions as in:
That and those are used to refer to people 
that are distant from the speaker.
That guy over there is my brother, Harry.
Those two in red are my friends, Lucy and Larry.
This is my friend, Lucy.
The demonstrative pronouns are:
Close
Singular Plural
Distant
this these
that those
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
72
L E S S O N 2
BASIC 2
Sentence Structure
Subject + Verb To Be (Present) + Main Verb (–ING Form) + Complement
PRESENT CONTINUOUS
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
Take a look at the structure of the present continuous:
• Present Continuous: Affirmative
John is sweeping the floor. Paty is making her bed.
Sentence Structure
Subject + To Be (Present/Negative) + Main Verb (–ING Form) + Complement
• Present Continuous: Negative
Johnny isn’t paying attention to class. Mark isn’t cleaning the house.
Sentence Structure
To Be (Present) + Subject + Main Verb (–ING Form) + Complement
• Present Continuous: Interrogative
Is Carrie receiving friends at home? Is Fred cooking dinner? 
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
73
We use the Present Continuous to talk about actions that are in progress at the moment of speaking and that 
are temporary.
Continuous Actions/Events
Now Right now At the moment Today This morning/afternoon Tonight
Words commonly used with the Present Continuous:
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
Sarah – Janet, I need some help. 
Janet – Sure. What are you doing? 
Sarah – I’m working on a financial report. 
Janet – OK…let’s see. Are you calculating income 
and expenses?
Sarah – Yes, I am. And I am registering everything. 
Janet – OK. Let’s finish this together. 
At Work
Helen – Nick, are you cleaning your bedroom?
Nick – I’m not cleaning the bedroom yet, but I 
will soon.
Helen – What are you doing, then? 
Nick – I’m finishing an episode of Zombie Attack. 
Helen – Are you kidding me? Tidy up this room 
right now! 
Nick – What are you doing? 
Helen – I’m doing your laundry. Just get up!
At Home
:: COMMON MISTAKES
I N C O R R E CT
I working at this moment.
Mario not writing the report.
C O R R E CT
I’m working at this moment.
Mario isn’t writing the report.
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
74
L E S S O N 2
BASIC 2
• All verbs, except for the verbs to be and to have, follow the spelling rules of the simple present. Take a look 
at the verb to like.
 Singular Plural
First Person I like We like
Second Person You like You like
Third Person He/She/It likes They like
• Third Person Inflection
To form the third person affirmative, pay attention to the following rules: 
Verbs ending in –SH, –CH, –X, –S, –Z, or –O Add –ES.
Sam goes to work by car. Cindy washes the dishes after lunch. A mechanic fixes cars. 
SIMPLE PRESENT
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
Let’s take another look at the use of the simple present: 
Now, check the use of the verb to be in the simple present:
Simple Present
Permanent Situations → Facts 
A bank manager works in a bank. 
Habitual Actions → Habits, Routine
Julia has breakfast every morning.
To Be Describes facts, permanent states, and location
 Gail is independent. (state)
 Ohio is in the U.S.A. (location)
• The verb to be is unique—let’s review its affirmative form, which is different from all other verbs: 
 Singular Plural
First Person I am We are
Second Person You are You are
Third Person He/She/It is They are
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
75
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
Verbs ending in consonant + –Y Drop –Y and add –IES.
All other verbs Add –S.
Stacy studies in a great college. (to study) 
Mary dances very well. 
Mike cries during sad movies. (to cry) 
Liam writes poems. 
To form the negative and the interrogative forms, it is necessary to use the auxiliary verb Does.
Affirmative: Susan likes to work in the morning. 
Negative: Susan doesn’t like to work in the morning. 
Interrogative: Does Susan like to work in the morning? 
Sentence Structure—Simple Present
Affirmative: Subject + Verb + Complement
Negative: Subject + Don’t/Doesn’t + Bare Infinitive Verb + Complement
Interrogative: Do/Does + Subject + Bare Infinitive Verb + Complement
At a Restaurant with a Friend
Quinn – So, what do you want to eat?
Neil – I don’t know. I like pasta and Mia loves pizza.
Quinn – I like pizza. Cheese or Vegetarian?
Neil – Vegetarian? Do you really like vegetarian pizza? 
Quinn – My girlfriend doesn’t eat meat, so I have to 
order the vegetarian pizza sometimes. 
Neil – Oh, I see. Well, Mia eats everything she sees. 
It’s easy and great!
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
76
L ES S O N 2
BASIC 2
• Adverbs of Frequency 
Always Usually/Frequently Often 
ADVERBS OF FREQUENCY
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
Adverbs modify 
Verbs
Adjectives
Other Adverbs
Sentence Construction
There are different positions for adverbs of frequency:
Subject + Adverb + Verb + Complement → Lucy always goes to the beach.
Subject + Verb + Complement + Adverb → Marcy likes to ride a bike sometimes. 
:: COMMON MISTAKES
 I N C O R R E CT
She like the beach?
Josh work on weekends.
Mom don’t like to sleep late.
Tony doesn’t likes coffee.
C O R R E CT
Does she like the beach?
Josh works on weekends.
Mom doesn’t like to sleep late.
Tony doesn’t like coffee.
L E S S O N 3
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
77
Sometimes Rarely/Seldom Never
Once
(1x)
Twice 
(2x)
a day
a week
a month
a year
a day
a week
a month
a year
• Adverbial Expressions: Frequency 
Adverbial expressions are normally used at the end of sentences. 
Three times (3x), Four times (4x), etc. 
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
At the Dentist
Dentist – How often do you brush your teeth?
Jake – I brush my teeth three times a day. 
Dentist – OK. And how often do you floss? 
Jake – I always floss. 
Dentist – Great. How often do you use mouthwash?
Jack – I use it sometimes. 
Dentist – I see. Please, use it every day, OK?
:: STAY ALERT
• Seldom is more commonly used in writing. 
• Usually, often, frequently, and sometimes can be used in end position to focus on frequency, but they are 
more common in mid position. 
Kurt sometimes drives to work. → More common
Kurt drives to work sometimes. → Emphasis on sometimes
:: COMMON MISTAKES
 I N C O R R E CT
Kate goes frequently to the gym.
Rick twice a day eats.
C O R R E CT
Kate frequently goes to the gym.
Rick eats twice a day.
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
78
L E S S O N 3
BASIC 2
L E S S O N 3
PRESENT CONTINUOUS: SPELLING RULES
There are Spelling Rules for the main verb in the –ING Form. Let’s analyze them.
• General Rule: Verb + (–ING)
Play → The boys are playing soccer. Do → Sonia is doing the laundry. 
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
Take a look at the timeline for the present continuous. 
Continuous Actions/Events
Sentence Structure
Affirmative
Subject + Verb To Be (Present) + Main Verb (–ING Form) + Complement
Negative
Subject + Verb To Be (Present/Negative) + Main Verb (–ING Form) + Complement
Interrogative
Verb To Be (Present) + Subject + Main Verb (–ING Form) + Complement
• Verb ending in –E → Drop –E and add –ING
Dance → Cinthia is dancing at the club. Write → Don is writing a new book. 
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
79
• Verb ending in Consonant + Vowel + Consonant with stress on the last syllable → 
Double the last consonant and add –ING 
Plan → Larry and Stephanie are PLANning a trip. Swim → Lena is SWIMming at the club.
Control → Kim is contROLling the payments this month. 
Lie → Theresa is lying on the bed. Die → The kid is dying to go to the bathroom. 
• Verb ending in –IE → Drop –IE and add –YING
:: STAY ALERT
Attention to syllable stress. 
Refer → She is reFERring to the first paragraph. (2x last consonant)
Travel → We are TRAveling to Asia. (add –ING)
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
80
L E S S O N 3
BASIC 2
L E S S O N 3
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
:: COMMON MISTAKES
I N C O R R E CT
Amanda is joging with her friends.
Fred is dateing Mary.
C O R R E CT
Amanda is jogging with her friends.
Fred is dating Mary.
QUESTION WORDS REVIEW
At Home 
Pearl – Jake, what are you doing? 
Jake – I’m listening to music, mom. Why? 
Pearl – Can you give me a hand here? 
I’m changing the light bulb, but it’s too 
difficult. 
Jake – OK! I’m going to be there in a minute. 
Pearl – Please, I’m almost falling off this ladder. 
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
Things Activities
What 
People
Who
Frequency
How Often
Location
Where
Time
When
Clock Time
What Time O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
81
What do you like to drink for breakfast? → I like coffee. What do you do? → I am a psychologist.
What’s your name? = Who are you? 
→ My name is Jessica. / I am Jessica. 
Where is the meeting? → It’s in the conference room. 
• With the verb to be 
Question Word + Verb To Be + Complement
When is your birthday? 
→ It’s in November. / It’s on November 5th. 
What time is it? → It’s nine o’clock. 
• With other verbs
Question Word + Do/Does + Subject + Verb + Complement
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
82
L E S S O N 3
BASIC 2
At the Doctor
Charles – Hello, Miriam. Please, take a seat. 
Miriam – Hello, Dr. Charles. 
Charles – So, Miriam…What is the problem?
Miriam – I frequently have headaches. 
Charles – How often do you have these headaches? 
Miriam – Almost every day, usually in the morning.
Charles – What do you eat for breakfast?
Miriam – I have a slice of bread, some coffee, and 
 some fruit. 
Charles – Where do you eat breakfast?
Miriam – In the kitchen. I don’t have much time. 
Charles – Hmm...You have to try to eat calmly. I’ll 
 prescribe painkillers.
When do you go out? → I go out on weekends.What time do you go to the gym? 
→ I go to the gym at 6 a.m. 
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
When do you go out? → I go out on weekends. Where do you have lunch? → I have lunch at a 
restaurant near work. 
Who do you live with? → I live with my parents.What do you do on vacation? → I travel to the beach.
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
abra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
83
:: COMMON MISTAKES
 I N C O R R E CT
You are who?
Where is you live?
How often time do you go to the gym?
C O R R E CT
Who are you?
Where do you live?
How often do you go to the gym?
QUESTION WORD: HOW OFTEN
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
How often...? → Frequency 
Sentence Structure
How Often + Do/Does + Subject + Verb + Complement
Ann – How often do you have English classes? 
Beth – I have English classes twice a week. 
• How Often vs. What Time vs. When 
How Often → 
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
84
L E S S O N 3
BASIC 2
• Possible Answers for Questions with How Often 
How often do you eat fruit?
We eat fruit... 
once a day/week/month. (1x)
twice a day/week/year. (2x)
three/four times a week, a month, a year.
How often do I have to come here? 
Ideally, you have to exercise... 
every day.
every other day.
every two days.
every morning/afternoon/night.
What Time → When → 
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
85
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
:: COMMON MISTAKES
I N C O R R E CT
How frequent do you work?
How often you go to the gym?
C O R R E CT
How often do you work?
How often do you go to the gym?
Take a look at a dialogue with all these question words: 
Trey – Julia, do you want to come to Dave’s party with me?
Julia – When is it? 
Trey – It’s next week, on Tuesday. 
Julia – What time is it going to be?
Trey – In the evening, at around seven o’clock. 
Julia – Oh, I can’t. I have my dance class. 
Trey – But you have it on Monday too...How often do you practice?
Julia – Almost every day. I’m off only on Fridays and Sundays. 
L E S S O N 4
ADJECTIVES TO DESCRIBE PLACES
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
Adjectives → Descriptions → Characteristics 
 
Let’s review sentence structure with adjectives? 
Sentence Structure
Subject + Verb To Be + Adjective → Corcovado is amazing.
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
86
L E S S O N 4
BASIC 2
Subject + Verb To Be + A/An + Adjective + Noun → Copacabana is a famous beach.
L E S S O N 4
Subject + Verb + Preposition + A/An + Adjective + Noun → The Botanical Garden is an impressive place. 
• Don’t forget that adjectives in English aren’t used in the plural form. 
Cape Town and Johannesburg are big South African cities. 
• Take a look at some more adjectives used to describe places: 
A N E AT R O O M A SA F E S T R E E TA F I LT H Y R O O M A DAN G E RO U S S T R E E T 
V S . V S .
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
87
A TAC K Y D E C O R AT I O N 
A N UN C OM FO R TA B L E S O F A
A T E R R I B L E P L A C E 
A H O R R I B L E V I E W
A WEL L- D E C O R AT E D R O O M
A C OM FO R TA B L E / C OZ Y S O F A 
A G R E AT P L A C E 
A N AMAZ I N G V I E W
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
Talking about Vacations
Diane – Tell me about Paris, Amy! 
Amy – Oh, Diane, it’s an amazing city! The people 
are very reserved…but the atmosphere is so 
refreshing. 
Diane – Really? Isn’t it dangerous?
Amy – Every place is dangerous somehow, you need 
to be careful, but it is OK. 
Diane – It is a big metropolis. Isn’t it noisy? 
Amy – In some areas it is, but it is different if you just 
get into a cozy café, order an espresso and a 
macaron. It feels…fancy!
Diane – Oh, I can picture it. I’m sure it is a great place. 
V S .
V S .
V S .
V S .
A P E AC E F U L P L A C E A Q U I E T P L A C EA NO I SY N E I G H B O R H O O D A CA LM N E I G H B O R H O O D 
V S . ==
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
88
L E S S O N 4
BASIC 2
INTENSIFIERS
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
Intensifiers + Adjectives = Strong Adjective 
Intensifiers + Verb = Strong Action 
Sentence Structure
Subject + Verb + Intensifier + Adjective → Angela is very beautiful. 
Subject + Verb + A/An + Intensifier + Adjective + Complement → New York is a very busy city. 
Subject + Intensifier + Verb + Complement → Anthony really likes to dance. 
Take a look at some intensifiers.
“Bloody Monster” is a really scary movie! Look 
at Brad! He is really scared.
Bungee jumping is very exciting.
Bungee jumping is quite exciting.
Bungee jumping is extremely exciting.
Bungee jumping is so exciting.
• Really • Very, Quite, So, and Extremely
:: COMMON MISTAKES
I N C O R R E CT
London and New York are greats cities.
Hawaii is a peaceful.
This is a place safe.
C O R R E CT
London and New York are great cities.
Hawaii is peaceful.
This is a safe place.
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
89
Look at Christina’s face near candies. 
She likes them a lot! 
John is a bit hungry. (but not very much)
John is kind of hungry.
• A Lot • A Bit, Kind of 
:: STAY ALERT
A lot ≠ A lot of
Mike goes to the beach a lot. OK
Mike goes a lot to the beach. OK
Mike goes to a lot of beaches. QUANTITY, NOT INTENSITY
Leaving a Place 
Dea – You’re walking really fast. What’s up?
Tony – I’m very late for a meeting. Talk to you later!
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
:: COMMON MISTAKES
I N C O R R E CT
My mom loves very movies.
Tommy eats very chocolate.
C O R R E CT
My mom loves many / a lot of movies.
Tommy eats a lot of chocolate. / Tommy 
eats chocolate a lot.
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
PF
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
90
L E S S O N 4
BASIC 2
SIMPLE PRESENT VS. PRESENT CONTINUOUS
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
• Timelines
Simple Present Present Continuous
Continuous Actions/EventsFacts/Events
• Use 
• First and Second Persons—Singular and Plural
Simple Present
Facts, Permanent States, Habits, and Physical Laws
Present Continuous 
Temporary, incomplete, or limited-duration actions 
around the present moment
Simple Present
 
Affirmative 
I, you, we, they dance.
Negative
I, you, we, they don’t dance. 
Interrogative
Do I, we, you, they dance?
Present Continuous 
Affirmative 
I am dancing.
You, we, they are dancing.
Negative
I am not dancing. 
You, we, they are not dancing.
Interrogative
Am I dancing?
Are you, we, they dancing?
Example: To Dance 
Simple Present
 
Affirmative 
He, she, it dances. 
Negative
He, she, it doesn’t dance. 
Interrogative
Does he, she, it dance?
Present Continuous 
Affirmative 
He, she, it is dancing.
Negative
He, she, it isn’t dancing.
Interrogative
Is he, she, it dancing?
Example: To Dance
• Third Person Singular 
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
91
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
Simple Present
 
Always, Usually, Normally, Frequently
Sometimes, Often, Rarely, Never
Every day, Every week, on Mondays
Present Continuous 
Now, Right Now, At the moment, Today
Tonight, This month, This week
• Keywords 
At the Doctor
Dr. Martin – Carol, how often do you exercise? 
Carol – I usually exercise, but I’m not going to the gym this week.
Dr. Martin – Why aren’t you exercising this week? (temporary situation)
Carol – I work from nine a.m. to six p.m., but this month I’m working from seven a.m. to four p.m. (fact/
limited-duration action around the present moment)
On the Phone
Laura – Mark, where are you? 
Mark – Hey, mom. I’m arriving at school right now.
Laura – OK. Do you have soccer practice today? 
Mark – Yeah, we’re training for the finals.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
I N C O R R E CT
I’m usually waking up early.
I love soccer, but I don’t play this week.
I walking to work every day, but today I drive.
C O R R E CT
I usually wake up early.
I love soccer, but I’m not playing this week.
I walk to work every day, but today I’m driving.
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
92
L E S S O N 4
BASIC 2
THERE + TO BE
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
There + To Be → Expresses Existence 
• There + To Be in the Simple Present 
Sentence Construction
 Singular Plural
Affirmative There is / There’s There are
Negative There is not / There isn’t There are not / There aren’t
Interrogative Is there...? Are there...?
There Is/Are + Complement
There Is + Singular Noun
There is a cat in the room.
There is a cat and a dog in the room.
There Are + Plural Noun
There are cats in the room.
There Are + Plural Noun + Singular Noun
There are cats and a dog in the room.
• What is there in...?
What is there in this kitchen? 
What is there in this shopping bag?
There is a refrigerator, a microwave oven, 
a stove, a table, and chairs. 
There are fruits and vegetables. 
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
93
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
Looking for a House 
Real Estate Agent – So, what is there in the house of 
your dreams?
Mick – There is a big garden, a large 
kitchen with modern equipment...
Anna – There are two floors in our dream 
house. There’s a swimming pool 
and three bedrooms. 
Real Estate Agent – Perfect! I have some houses to 
show you. Let’s go!
:: STAY ALERT
There’s a problem with the computer. → Contraction OK → Spoken and Informal language
There is a problem with the computer → No contraction → Written and/or Formal language 
There are problems with the computer → Contractions are not possible 
:: COMMON MISTAKES
I N C O R R E CT
Have three bedrooms in this house.
There many restaurants in Soho.
There are a car and a motorcycle in the garage.
C O R R E CT
There are three bedrooms in this house.
There are many restaurants in Soho.
There is a car and a motorcycle in the garage.
I N C O R R E CT
Have three bedrooms in this house.
There many restaurants in Soho.
There are a car and a motorcycle in the garage.
C O R R E CT
There are three bedrooms in this house.
There are many restaurants in Soho.
There is a car and a motorcycle in the garage.
:: LANGUAGE IN ACTION
How do you talk about your schedule and regular activities? 
Here is Gaby, a working mom with a very busy life, and she will help you with it. 
R E V I E W
HOW TO TALK ABOUT YOUR SCHEDULE
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
94
BASIC 2
R E V I E W
In order to talk about your schedule, you need to use:
• Simple Present → For actions that are fixed in your schedule and for habitual actions.
• Present Continuous → For actions you are doing temporarily.
• Time Expressions (Present) → To locate your activities in time. 
• Adverbs of Frequency → To express the number of times you do an activity.
• Time → To state what time you do certain activities. 
Let’s see what Gaby has to say about her schedule.
Check the element you studied in Gaby’s routine:
• Simple Present: I’m Gaby and I am a working mom. / I work in the office and at home. / I wake up at six 
a.m. and then I wake my daughter up; / I prepare our breakfast and eat with my daughter and husband. / 
When we finish breakfast, I take a shower and walk my daughter to school. → They are actions Gaby 
performs every day. 
• Time Expressions (Present): Then, After That, When → Days and Sequence of Events
• Time → At six a.m. 
Let’s see what Gaby has to say about her schedule.
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
95
Here she uses: 
• Simple Present: Ride, Get, Read, Write, Participate, Have Lunch → actions that Gaby performs every day or 
sometimes
• Present Continuous: Am notgoing → Temporary Situation 
• Adverbs of Frequency: Sometimes, Usually, Normally, Always → the number of times these actions happen
• Time Expressions: When, at the moment
• Time: At one p.m. 
Some situations where we can talk about schedules are: 
Meeting people Enrolling in a course Informal conversations At the doctor At work
BASIC CONNECTORS: AND, BUT, SO
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
L E S S O N 5
And But So
Adds Information Opposes Ideas Concludes Ideas
• Position in a Sentence
Sentence or Information 1 + AND + Sentence or Information 2 → Gabe swims and plays soccer.
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
96
L E S S O N 5
BASIC 2
Sentence or Information 1 + BUT + Sentence or Information 2 → Mike is on a diet, but he doesn’t like salad. 
Sentence or information 1 + SO + Conclusion → It is sunny, so I’m going to the beach.
At College 
Professor – Guys, the exams are next week, 
so you have to study. 
Kerry – Professor, I have questions 
about Law and Management. 
Professor – OK, ask your questions, but the 
exam is about Sociology.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
I N C O R R E CT
Pam likes movies. Likes theater plays too.
So, I don’t go to the beach. I don’t like it.
C O R R E CT
Pam likes movies and theater plays too.
I don’t like it, so I don’t go to the beach.
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
97
EXPRESSING POSSESSION: REVIEW
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
• Possessive Adjectives → Express Possession → Together with Noun → My car
 Singular Plural
First person My Our
Second person Your Your
Third person His Their
 Her
 Its
• Possessive Case (’S or ’) → Expresses Possession → Together with Noun or Name 
Case 1: Singular Nouns or Names → ’S
Case 2: Plural Nouns → ’
This is my friend’s house.
My friends’ wedding was fantastic. 
Charles’s (or Charles’) sister likes videogames. 
Teachers will correct students’ homework at 
the beginning of classes. 
Important Note: There are two ways to form the Possessive Case of names and singular words that 
end in –S: 
Charles’ sister = Charles’s sister. Both are correct, but Charles’s is more common. 
My boss’ car = My boss’s car. Both are correct, but boss’s is more common.
M A R K
M Y F R I E N D S 
S T U D E N T S 
C H A R L E S C H A R L E S ’ S S I S T E R 
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
98
L E S S O N 5
BASIC 2
Case 3: Plural forms that don’t end in –S → ’S
The children’s parents will pick them up. People’s votes are important in a democracy. 
:: STAY ALERT
These are Jack and Mary’s bikes. 
These are Hugh’s and Josh’s bikes. 
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
99
Kurt – Lia, do you want a ride home? 
Lia – Do you have a car? 
Kurt – I don’t, but I’m using my dad’s car today. 
A Ride
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
:: COMMON MISTAKES
I N C O R R E CT
My parents’s house is in Chelsea.
Where is Tony’ house?
C O R R E CT
My parents’ house is in Chelsea.
Where is Tony’s house?
IMPERATIVES
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
IMPERATIVES 
Orders 
Instructions/
Directions
Requests
Structure 
Affirmative
Verb in the Bare Infinitive Form 
Sit.
Negative
Don’t + Verb in the Bare Infinitive Form
Don’t sit here.
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
100
L E S S O N 5
BASIC 2
Paul – Excuse me, sir. How can I get to the Eiffel Tower? 
Man – Oh, take the train to Champ de Mars and go straight 
ahead. You’ll see the tower on your right. 
Paul – Thank you, sir.
Lost in Paris 
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
:: COMMON MISTAKES
I N C O R R E CT
Don’t left.
Go to straight ahead on Lilly Street.
C O R R E CT
Don’t turn left.
Go straight ahead on Lilly Street.
• Giving Directions
How do I get from the café to the hotel? 
Go straight ahead. 
How do I get from the hotel to the school?
Walk down the street, turn left, and then turn right. 
How do I get from the school to the food joint?
Cross the street.
• Other expressions with Imperatives to give directions:
Keep going up to Lords Square.
Make a left on 8th Avenue.
Take the 8 bus and get off at St. Johns.
8th AVENUE
LORDS SQUARE ST. JOHNS
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
101
LIKES AND DISLIKES
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
Likes, dislikes, and preferences 
Things
Actions
Things 
Expressing Likes 
Subject + Like/Love/Adore + Noun
Example: Martha likes basketball. 
Expressing Dislikes
Subject + Dislike/Hate/Detest/Can’t Stand/Don’t Like + Noun
Example: Jackson hates soccer. 
Actions 
Expressing Likes 
Subject + Like/Love/Adore + To + Verb 
Example: Tommy loves to play hockey.
Subject + Like/Love/Enjoy + Verb in the –ING Form 
Example: Laura enjoys skiing.
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
102
L E S S O N 5
BASIC 2
YES/NO QUESTIONS
Do you like + Noun?
Do you like to + Verb?
Does he like + Noun?
Does he like to + Verb?
Do your brothers enjoy + Noun?
Do your brothers enjoy + Verb in the –ING 
Form?
Your brothers = They
Does your mother enjoy + Noun?
Does your mother enjoy + Verb in the –ING 
Form?
Your mother = She
What does Peter like for breakfast? 
He likes juice and toast.
What do you like for breakfast? 
I like juice and toast.
• Asking About Likes and Dislikes
CONTENT QUESTIONS
What + DO/DOES + Subject + Verb + ComplementImportant Note:
You use the auxiiary 
verb DO before I, you, 
we, and they.
You use the auxiliary 
verb DOES before he, 
she, and it.
• Expressing Preferences: Structure 
Things
Subject + Verb To Prefer + Noun 
Willie prefers pasta. He just loves it.
Actions
Subject + Verb To Prefer + Verb in the –ING form or To + Verb
Willie prefers to go to the beach. or Willie prefers going to the beach.
Expressing Dislikes 
Subject + Don’t Like/Don’t Love/Dislike/
Hate/Detest/Can’t Stand + To + Verb 
Example: Lyla doesn’t like to run.
Subject + Don’t Like/Dislike/Don’t Love/
Detest + Verb in the –ING Form 
Example: Leon detests playing baseball.
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
103
Michael – Honey, let’s order a pizza? 
Jenna – Hm, OK. I like pizza, but I prefer to go 
 out rather than ordering at home. 
Michael – Really? I'm feeling lazy tonight...
Jenna – Oh, come on! You know I don’t like to 
stay at home on the weekends.
Michael – Fine...I prefer to go out tonight rather 
than going out to morrow. 
Jenna – Lovely! Tomorrow we stay in and 
watch a romantic movie. 
Michael – An action movie...you know I hate 
romantic movies. 
Jenna – We’ll talk about it tomorrow. Come on, 
let’s go. 
I N C O R R E CT
I prefer to go out than to stay home.
I prefer a burger than fruit.
C O R R E CT
I prefer to go out rather than stay home.
I prefer a burger to fruit.
The Weekend
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
:: COMMON MISTAKES
MAKING REQUESTS
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
Requests 
Favors
Permission
• Can you...? → Informal Favors → You expect the answer 
to be “yes.”
Sentence Structure
Can you + Verb in the Bare Infinitive + Complement
Can you help me with the dishes?
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
104
L E S S O N 5
BASIC 2
• Could you...? → Formal Favors → You don’t know what the 
answer will be. 
Sentence Structure
Could you + Verb in the Bare Infinitive + Complement
Could you cook dinner tonight? 
• May I...? → Formal Permission → You don’t know what 
the answer will be.
Sentence Structure
May I + Verb in the Bare Infinitive + Complement
May I help you dust? 
At Home 
Tanya – Keyla, can you help me clean the house? 
Keyla – Sure, mom. What do you want me to do?
Tanya – Could you mop the floor? 
Keyla – Sure. 
Tanya – Thank you, honey. 
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
:: COMMON MISTAKES
I N C O R R E CT
Can you to sweep the room, please?
I can help you hang the clothes?
Do you can get the phone, please?
C O R R E CT
Can you sweep the room, please?
Can I help you hang the clothes?
Can you get the phone, please?
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
105
Can you
May I
Could I
Verb in the Bare Infinitive + Complement
(Ex: Be, Play, Work, Do...)
Requests 
Favors
Requests 
Permission
Verb in the Bare Infinitive + Complement
Could you 
Can I
MAKING REQUESTS: REVIEW
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
L E S S O N 6
Mr. Carpenter – Ariella, can you bring me some coffee, please?
Ariella – OK, sir. Here it is. 
Mr. Carpenter – Thank you. Now, can you collect Rick’s Restaurant contract?
Ariella – Sure. 
Mr. Carpenter – Ariella, can I ask you a question? 
Ariella – Of course you can, Mr. Carpenter. 
Mr. Carpenter – Is this your first job? 
Ariella – It is, sir. My first day at my first job. 
Mr. Carpenter – It is a great start. I like the job you're doing. 
Ariella – That’s great to hear, sir. Can I take my lunch break now? 
Mr. Carpenter – Certainly. See you later. 
A New Secretary 
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
:: COMMON MISTAKES
I N C O R R E CT
Can you to send me an email, please?
I can take my coffee break now?
Do you could announce the meeting?
C O R R E CT
Can you send me an email, please?
Can I take my coffee break now?
Could you announce the meeting?
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
106
L E S S O N 6
BASIC 2
The Possessive Pronouns are: 
 Singular Plural
First Person mine (I) ours (we)
Second Person yours (you) yours (you)
Third Person his (he) theirs (their)
 hers (she)
 its (it)
Structure
There are many ways to use a Possessive Pronoun. 
In a Clause
Sentence 1 with a Reference of Possession + Subject + Verb + Possessive Pronoun
Sonia is Mark’s mother, Yvette is mine. (Yvette is my mother.) 
In context
Character 1: Sentence with a reference 
of possession.
Character 1: My pen isn’t working...
 (reference of possession)
Character 2: Sentence with a possessive 
pronoun referring to the same thing.
Character 2: Here. Use mine. 
(my pen = same thing) 
Take a look: 
My dog is very sweet. Hers (her dog) is really aggressive.
POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
are used to refer to a noun that was mentioned before or that is known by the parts. 
are not followed by a noun.
Possessive Pronouns
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
107
Of + Possessive Pronoun
Henry is a friend of mine. (Henry is one of my friends.)
Gift Exchange
Kelly – Hey, honey, here’s your present. Merry Christmas! 
Toby – It’s a book. That is so lovely! Thank you so much! 
Kelly – You’re welcome! A friend of mine told me it’s a great book! Now…Where’s mine? 
Toby – Yours? 
Kelly – Yeah…where is my present?
Toby – Christmas is next week, all right?
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
:: COMMON MISTAKES
I N C O R R E CT
Yours friends are coming.
This seat is my.
C O R R E CT
Your friends are coming.
This seat is mine.
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
108
L E S S O N 6
BASIC 2
Sentence Order with Whose and Verb to Be: 
QUESTION WORDS REVIEW + QUESTION WORD WHOSE
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
Things Activities
What 
People FrequencyLocationTimeClock Time
Who How OftenWhen What TimeWhere
Sentence Order with What, Who, When, Where, and How Often
With the Verb To Be: Question Word + Verb To Be + Complement
With Other Verbs: Question Word + Do You + Verb + Complement
With the Verb To Be: Whose + Noun + To Be + Complement → Whose bag is this?
With Other Verbs: Whose + Noun + Verb To Be + Subject + Complement → Whose car are you driving? 
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
109
Possessive Case
Whose book is this? It’s Mary’s. 
Possessive Adjectives 
Where’s Mary? Whose chair is this? 
It’s her (Mary’s) chair. Mary will be back soon. 
Possessive Pronouns
Is this laptop Mary’s? Whose laptop is this?
Yes, it’s hers (Mary’s).
Whose car is this? → More common
Whose is this car? → Not very common
• Answering Questions With Whose 
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
:: STAY ALERT
:: COMMON MISTAKES
I N C O R R E CT
Whose are you brother?
C O R R E CT
Whose brother are you?
Parking
John – There is a car blocking me. 
Tracy – But whose car is it? 
John – I don’t know. I just know that I need it out. O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
110
L E S S O N 6
BASIC 2
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
Full hour: It’s + Hour + O’clock → It’s eleven o’clock. Hour and Minutes: It’s + Hour + Minutes → It’s nine ten. 
Take a look at other ways: 
• Hour and minutes → It’s + Hour + Minutes OR It’s + Minutes + Past + Hour
It’s eight twenty-five. / It’s twenty-five past eight. It’s seven oh five. / It’s five past seven.
EXPRESSING TIME
• Minutes to the next hour → It’s + Hour + Minutes OR It’s + (60 – Minutes) + To + Next Hour
It’s eleven fifty-five. / It’s five to twelve. It’s eight thirty-five. / It’s twenty-five to nine. 
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
111
• A quarter past → It’s + Hour + Fifteen OR It’s + A Quarter Past + Hour
It’s ten fifteen. / It’s a quarter past ten. 
:: STAY ALERT
Just so you don’t forget: 
a.m. → from midnight to 11:59 (in the morning)
p.m. → from noon to 11:59 (in the evening)
12 a.m. = midnight 
12 p.m. = midday / noon 
:: COMMON MISTAKES
I N C O R R E CT
I have dinner at half to eight.
The meeting is at forty-five past one.
It is eight forty-five o’clock.
C O R R E CT
I have dinner at half past eight.
The meeting is at a quarter to two.
It is eight forty-five. / It’s a quarter to nine.
• Half past → It’s + Hour + Thirty OR It’s + 
 Half + Past + Hour
• A quarter to → It’s + Hour + Forty-five OR It’s + 
A Quarter To + Next Hour
It’s twelve thirty. / It’s half past twelve. It’s ten forty-five. / It's a quarter to eleven.
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
112
L E S S O N 6
BASIC 2
NOTES
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
114
L E S S O N 1
BASIC 3
DEFINITE, INDEFINITE, AND ZERO ARTICLES
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
Indefinite Articles 
Before singular nouns
Indicates “one” of a group
Not used with plural nouns
A → Before consonant sounds
An → Before vowel sounds
A M A N
A N H O U R
A U N I F O R M
A N U M B R E L L A 
A W O M A N 
A N O R A N G E
A H O R S E
A N E M A I L
A H O U S E
A N A R C H I T E C T
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
115
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
At a Café
Definite Articles
Zero Article 
The figures in Mount Rushmore
You need flour, milk, butter, 
and eggs to make a cake
The blue chair
Tony designs buildings. 
The Statue of Liberty
Sasha loves her car. 
*Exception: used before proper nouns like the United States, the United Kingdom, the Maldives.
Before nouns that refer to particular things, things people know of
Before nouns that refer to something unique
Not used before proper nouns*
No indefinite article before plural nouns 
No article before general and uncountable nouns
No article before nouns in unlimited numbers
No article before possessives
Paul – Good afternoon. Table for three, please. 
Waiter – Sure. Follow me. Would you like to see the 
menu? 
Paul – Yes, please. I’d like a cup of coffee and a 
bottle of water. 
Mary – Do you serve diet soda? 
Waiter – Yes, we do. 
Mary – Then, a diet soda and an apple tart. 
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
116
L E S S O N 1
BASIC 3
Singular = 1 Plural > 1
Nouns That Don’t Have a Plural Form 
:: STAY ALERT
Elliot – Patty, want to go out? Maybe to the movies? (the movies = cinema)
Patty – We can. I would love to watch a movie. (one movie out of all the movies in the cinema)
Elliot – How about The Adventures of Mia or Nonstop Nightmare?
Patty – Horror movies are not romantic, Elliot. (horror movies in general)
The use of the article may infer different meanings. Take a look: 
Let’s review the plural forms in English.
information
advice
help
satisfaction 
traffic
nature 
homework
education 
attention 
mail
There are wordsin English that don't have a plural form and words that are always used in the plural form.
You may use the quantifier some to express an idea of regular quantity with some of these nouns, like: 
some information, some traffic, some attention.
Hi, I need some information. 
How much is this book?
Let me see. It’s US$9.
Ending in consonant + –Y → Drop the –Y and add –IES.
Ending in –CH, –SH, –S, –X or –Z → Add –ES.
Ending in consonant + –O → Add –ES.
Ending in –F or –FE → Drop the –F or –FE and add –VES.
Irregular plural → No spelling rules
Other words → Add –S.
lady – ladies
box – boxes
tomato – tomatoes
wife – wives
mouse – mice 
car – cars
PLURAL FORMS
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
117
Words Always Used in the Plural Form
Mother and Son 
Sonia – Jack, get up. It’s time to go to school.
Jack – I don’t want to go to school. I hate school. 
Sonia – Here’s some advice: change your mind. 
 You need education to get a good job. 
Jack – OK, OK. I’ll go, but don’t expect me to like it. 
Shopping 
Will – I hate shopping, but I need new sunglasses. 
Paula – You also need new clothes…like new pants and a T-shirt. 
Will – No, I don’t. I have clothes. 
Paula – You do, but they’re so old. 
Planning a Trip 
Gail – Stu, I’m booking your stay in Sidney. What kind of 
accomodations do you prefer?
Stu – The kind with a bed and a shower. 
Gail – I’m serious! A hotel, a hostel? 
Stu – A cheap place with some nature around. Does that work?
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
:: COMMON MISTAKES
I N C O R R E C T
Let’s search for informations.
Where is my pant?
I have lots of homeworks to do.
I have to collect my mails.
C O R R E C T
Let’s search for information.
Where are my pants?
I have lots of homework to do.
I have to collect my mail.
PA N T S 
H E A D P H O N E S
S C I S S O R S
S U N G L A S S E S
G L A S S E S
S H O R T S
C L O T H E S
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
118
BASIC 3
L E S S O N 1
I, He, She, It
You, We, They
Affirmative
was
were
Negative
was not (wasn’t)
were not (weren’t)
Interrogative
Was I, he, she, it...? 
Were you, we, they...?
Affirmative: Subject + Main Verb (–D, –ED, or –IED) + Complement
Negative: Subject + Did Not (Didn’t) + Bare Infinitive Verb + Complement
Interrogative: Did + Subject + Bare Infinitive Verb + Complement
Verbs Ending in E → add D → close – closed; dance – danced
Verbs Ending in Consonant + Y → change Y to IED → cry – cried; try – tried
Other Regular Verbs → add ED → play – played; visit – visited
Verbs ending in voiced sound → 
pronounce –ED as /d/
scream → screamed 
play → played 
Verbs ending in voiceless sound → 
pronounce –ED as /t/
talk → talked 
kiss → kissed 
:: STAY ALERT
Take a look at the differences in pronunciation 
for regular verbs depending on its termination.
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
Simple Past—Verb To Be
Simple Past—Regular Verbs
Spelling Rules for the Affirmative Form
Irregular verbs don’t take –D, –ED, or –IED. 
REGULAR VERBS AND VERB TO BE
Simple Past → Completed actions at a specific time in the past.
Past Present
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
119
Verbs ending in the sounds /t/ or /d/: 
pronounce –ED as /ɪd/
count → counted
found → founded 
compensate → compensated
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
Memories
Peter – Grandma, how long did you and Grandpa date?
Mary – Well, we dated for five years. Then I traveled on 
vacation…
Peter – Did he follow after you? How did he propose? 
Mary – Oh, he escaped from his parents’ and followed me. 
After that, he arrived at my uncle’s house on a horse and 
shouted that he wanted to marry me…
Peter – Oh my, that’s so romantic...and a little embarrassing too! 
:: COMMON MISTAKES
I N C O R R E C T
Mark didn’t played golf last night.
Did Tony talked to the manager?
C O R R E C T
Mark didn’t play golf last night.
Did Tony talk to the manager?
TIME EXPRESSIONS ABOUT THE PAST
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
Simple Past → Specific Time in the Past → Time Expressions, Dates, etc.
Take a look at some time expressions that make reference to the past. 
Today is June 10th, 2016.
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
120
L E S S O N 1
BASIC 3
L E S S O N 2
Yesterday was July 9th. 
I didn’t work last week. 
Paulie returned two days ago. 
My birthday was last month, in June. 
The Olympic Games took place in Rio in 2016. 
:: COMMON MISTAKES
I N C O R R E C T
I yesterday played basketball.
C O R R E C T
I played basketball yesterday.
Yesterday, I played basketball.
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
At Work
Sheila – Kate, did you prepare the report for the 
marketing department?
Kate – Yes, I did. I finished two days ago and 
emailed it to you yesterday. 
some time ago in the nineties the other day
Take a look at some possible collocations with last and ago:
Last night, last year, last month, last summer, last winter, last fall, last spring
Two days ago, a week ago, a month ago, five years ago
Some expressions are less specific when referring to past time, like:
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
SIMPLE PRESENT VS. PRESENT CONTINUOUS
• Use
Simple Present → Facts, Habits, and Routine
Facts/Events
Present Continuous → Actions in Progress at the Moment
Continuous Actions/Events
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
121
Structure
Contextual Difference
Simple Present → I usually go to the movies on Saturdays.
Used to describe habit or routine.
Simple Present
Affirmative: Subject + Main Verb + Complement
Negative: Subject + Auxiliary Verb Do + Not + Main Verb + Complement
Interrogative: Auxiliary Verb Do + Subject + Main Verb + Complement?
Present Continuous
Affirmative: Subject + Auxiliary Verb Be + Main Verb in –ING Form + Complement
Negative: Subject + Auxiliary Verb Be + Not + Main Verb in –ING Form + Complement
Interrogative: Auxiliary Verb Be + Subject+ Main Verb in –ING Form + Complement? 
Present Continuous → I’m watching a movie with Martin now.
Used to describe an action in progress at the moment.
Simple Present → I work in the afternoons.
Used to describe habit or routine.
Present Continuous → I’m working.
Used to describe an action in progress at the moment.
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
122
L E S S O N 2
BASIC 3
A. Some verbs are considered non-progressive, 
that is, they are not used in continuous forms. 
B. Some others, it will depend on their meaning.
1. I think this is a good idea.
2. I’m thinking about taking some days off.
1. Anne has three dogs and a cat.
2. I’m having dinner with my sister.
1. When you see Julio, tell him I need to talk to him.
2. I think that Andrew and Meg are seeing each other.
Non-progressive Verbs
Have
1. To possess something; to be the owner (Non-progressive)
2. To eat or drink; (Used in the continuous form)
See
1. The ability to see; to understand (Non-progressive)
2. To date (Used in the continuous form)
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
Husband – Hi, honey. Are you working?
Wife – No, I left work ten minutes ago. I’m going home.
Husband – Listen, I’m thinking about calling my parents and canceling dinner tonight.
Wife – Really? Why?
Husband – Because I have a terrible headache. I just want to go home and rest.
Wife – I see. But don’t you think it’s too late to cancel?
Husband – We can meet them tomorrow. They will understand.
Canceling Dinner
Want
The kids don’t want to go.
The kids are not wanting to go.
Need
I need to talk to you.
I’m needing to talk to you.
1. To have an opinion (Non-progressive)
2. The action of thinking (Used in the continuous form) 
Think
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
123
:: COMMON MISTAKES
I N C O R R E C T
I’m wanting to travel.
I’m understanding you.
C O R R E C T
I want to travel.
I understand you.
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
How much? → Uncountable Nouns
How Many? → Countable Nouns
Uncountable Nouns → Liquids, grains, gases, feelings, abstract ideas
Countable Nouns → Things we can count—table(s), dog(s), wallet(s), cup(s) of water
liquids
grains/powders
gases
feelings
abstract ideas
water, juice
rice, salt, sugar
oxygen
love, hate, attention
time, money
QUANTITY
HOW MUCH AND HOW MANY, NUMBERS, AND SOME AND ANY
How Much and How Many
To answer questions about quantity, 
especially with countable nouns, 
you use cardinal numbers. Take a look:
• Numbers
Structure
With There + To Be:
How Much/How Many + Noun + Is There/Are There? 
With Other Verbs:
How Much/How Many + Noun + Do/Does + Subject + Verb? 
How many people are there in your classroom?
There are twelve people in my classroom.
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
124
L E S S O N 2
BASIC 3
L E S S O N 2
Here are the numbers from 1 to 30: 
1 – One 11 – Eleven 21 – Twenty-one
2 – Two 12 – Twelve 22 – Twenty-two
3 – Three 13 – Thirteen 23 – Twenty-three 
4 – Four 14 – Fourteen 24 – Twenty-four
5 – Five 15 – Fifteen 25 – Twenty-five
6 – Six 16 – Sixteen 26 – Twenty-six
7 – Seven 17 – Seventeen 27 – Twenty-seven 
8 – Eight 18 – Eighteen 28 – Twenty-eight
9 – Nine 19 – Nineteen 29 – Twenty-nine
10 – Ten 20 – Twenty 30 – Thirty
Some and Any
There are some apples in the fruit crate.
How many apples?
I don’t know.
I don’t eat some fruits. 
Some = A Part of a Group 
→ Used in affirmative, negative, or interrogative sentences
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
125
There aren’t any red cars in the garage. 
There aren’t any green dresses in the closet. 
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
Carol – Darling, is there any milk in the fridge?
Luke – Hm, no, there isn’t any milk here. 
Carol – Are there cookies in the pantry? 
Luke – Yes, we have some cookies. 
Carol – What about eggs? Do we have any?
Luke – There are four eggs.
Making the Grocery List
:: COMMON MISTAKES
I N C O R R E C T
There is any sugar in the pantry.
How much radios are there in your house?
How many water is there in the fridge?
C O R R E C T
There is some sugar in the pantry.
How many radios are there in your house?
How much water is there in the fridge?
Any = Complete Absence = Zero 
→ Used in the negative for this meaning
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
126
L E S S O N 2
BASIC 3
Simple Past—Verb To Be
Note that the verb to be doesn’t take the auxiliary verb did and its conjugation is different from all other verbs.
IRREGULAR VERBS
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
Simple Past → Completed actions at a specific time in the past.
Past Present
Affirmative
I was a child.
You were at home.
He was a student.
She was a nurse.
It was a nice day.
We were together.
You were here.
They were single.
Negative
I wasn’t tired.
You weren’t at work.
He wasn’t in class.
She wasn’t well last night.
It wasn’t a good idea.
We weren’t relaxed.
You weren’t together.
They weren’t married.
Interrogative
Was I OK with it?
Were you happy?
Was he in Paris?
Was she sleepy?
Was it correct?
Were we informed?
Were you in Japan?
Were they friends?
Affirmative Form
Subject + Irregular Past Verb + Complement
Jenna drove home last night. 
Now take a look at some irregular verbs.
Infinitive Form
to go
to get
to take
to keep
to make
to have
to do
to send
to read
to write
Simple Past
went
got
took
kept
made
had
did
sent
read
wrote
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
127
Check the list of irregular verbs in the past at the end of this Language Guide.
At the Restaurant with a Friend
Ms. Flemming– Good morning, class. Did you read Chapter 7 of the book at home?
Julian – Yes, Ms. Flemming. I read it last night and wrote a summary. 
Ms. Flemming – That’s great! What else did you do about this chapter, Julian?
Julian – Well, I had a talk with my mother about it because she was an avid 
reader when she was a teenager and still loves this book! 
Ms. Flemming – Wonderful! So, what did she say? 
Julian – She said that the main character has a great lesson to teach us… 
:: COMMON MISTAKES
 I N C O R R E C T
Gilbert didn’t went to work yesterday.
Did you were home last night?
C O R R E C T
Gilbert didn’t go to work yesterday.
Were you home last night?
Negative Form
Subject + Did Not (Didn’t) + Bare Infinitive Verb + Complement
Jenna didn’t drive home last night.
Interrogative Form
Did + Subject + Bare Infinitive Verb + Complement
Did Jenna drive home last night?
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
128
L E S S O N 2
BASIC 3
L E S S O N 2
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
Time Expressions About the Present 
• Time Expressions About the Present 
Today is Wednesday, September 27th, 2017.
Yesterday was Tuesday, September 26th.
Now Right now 
Today At this moment
Nowadays This week/month/year
Yesterday In 1978
The day before Two/Some years ago
At that moment Last week/month/year
TIME EXPRESSIONS ABOUT THE PAST AND THE PRESENT
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
129
Sequence of Events
Helping with the House Chores
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
Leo – Tom, help me clean the house, please! 
Tom – Sure. What do you want me to do?
Leo – Did you do your laundry? 
Tom – Yeah, I did it last week. 
Leo – Not this week? Man, start with your laundry, and then clean the bathroom, please. 
Tom – OK. And after that? 
Leo – Just do what I asked you to do right now. 
Then
→ After that →
Now
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
130
L E S S O N 2
BASIC 3
L E S S O N 3
You don't know 
the exact quantity. 
You know if it’s a 
large or small quantity.
You use a 
quantifier when...
You know if it’s 
sufficient or not. 
• Quantifiers 
Countable Nouns
A lot of
Many
A few
Few 
Uncountable Nouns 
A lot of
Much
A little
Little
→ Very large quantity
→ Large quantity
→ Small but sufficient quantity
→ Small and insufficient quantity
“An apple a day keeps the doctor away.” 
How many apples? One apple = countable
How many days? One day = countable
We need oxygen and water to survive. 
How much oxygen? Uncountable
How much water? Uncountable 
Countable and Uncountable Nouns
COUNTABLE AND UNCOUNTABLE NOUNS AND EXPRESSIONS
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
Countable Nouns
Singular and plural
Modified by numerals
Fruits, people, computers...
Uncountable Nouns 
No plural
Substances, liquids, grains/powders, feelings... 
Bread, money, time, medicine, love...
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
131
Subject + Verb + Quantifier + Noun + Complement → 
We need to drink a few glasses of water every day. Bill Gates has a lot of money. 
:: STAY ALERT
Much is normally used with the negative form: 
There is not much work to do today. (There’s little work to do today.)
Uncountable nouns can be counted with countable elements: 
Water → Uncountable Glasses of water / Bottles of water → Countable 
Bread → Uncountable Loaves of bread / Slices of bread / Buns → Countable
Money → Uncountable Dollars → Countable 
Time → Uncountable Hours → Countable 
Time (as in hours, minutes, seconds) → Uncountable vs. Times (as in frequency) → Countable 
Sentence Structure
There + To Be + Quantifier + Noun + Complement →
There is a little orange juice in the fridge.There are many people on the street.
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
132
L E S S O N 3
BASIC 3
OBJECT PRONOUNS
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
Object Pronouns → After a verb, as the object of a sentence.
 → Refers to something that was previously mentioned or that is clear in context.
 Liam gave Cindy flowers. She loved them! (the flowers)
Sentence Structure
Subject + Verb + Complement (Object Pronouns) 
→ Jake likes me. 
Imperative + Complement (Object Pronouns) 
→ Talk to us. 
Family Dinner
Carly – Oh my God! That is too much food! 
Gail – It’s not, you’ll see. There are many people 
to eat, too. 
Carly – Well, that is true, but I’m on a diet, so 
I’ll only eat a little of the chicken. 
Gail – You say that all the time, but you can never 
resist having dessert. 
Carly – Dessert? Is there dessert? 
Gail – Of course there is dessert. There is 
chocolate pie, cherry crumble, lemon curd...
Carly – Good thing I lost a few pounds already! 
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
I N C O R R E C T
I think I exaggerated and ate much food. 
Tony needs a loan because he has a little money.
Traffic jams happen because of too much cars. 
C O R R E C T
I think I exaggerated and ate a lot of food.
Tony needs a loan because he has little money. 
Traffic jams happen because of too many cars.
Subject Pronouns Object PronounsVerb
Subject Pronouns
I
You
He 
She
It
We
You
They
Object Pronouns
Me
You
Him
Her
It
Us
You
Them
:: COMMON MISTAKES
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
133
 
SHOPPING
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
Do you like to go shopping? If so, what do you like to buy?
You can shop for:
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
At Work
Secretary – Mr. Atkins, Janet is here. 
Mr. Atkins – Please tell her to wait a little. (Her = Janet)
Secretary – Yes, sir. Call me when I can tell her to come 
 in. (Me = I / Her = Janet)
Mr. Atkins – I will.
:: COMMONMISTAKES
I N C O R R E C T
Mary’s mom wants to talk to she.
Me don’t work on Sundays.
You and me need to talk.
C O R R E C T
Mary’s mom wants to talk to her.
I don’t work on Sundays.
You and I need to talk.
C L O T H E S
G R O C E R I E S 
S H O E S
E L E C T R O N I C S
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
134
L E S S O N 3
BASIC 3
Here are some typical steps while shopping:
• Approaching and Greeting
 
Salesperson → Hello. 
Welcome! 
How can/may I help you? 
Can/May I help you?
Customer → Hi. 
Yes, please. 
No, thanks, I’m just browsing. 
• Asking for or Offering a Product
 
Salesperson → Are you looking for something specific? 
Would you like to try this on? 
Customer → I’d like to try those shoes on. 
Can/May I see that (product)?
• Asking for Details
 
Salesperson → What’s your size?
Customer → Do you have it in (color)? 
Do you have it in (size)? 
Do you have it in size (number)?
• Asking about Price and Payment 
Salesperson → Cash or credit? / Debit or credit?
Customer → How much is it? / How much are they? 
How much does it cost? / How much do they cost? 
Do you take all credit cards? 
Do you take debit cards?
• Reacting to Prices (customer only) 
High Prices → Oh my, that’s expensive! 
That’s a pretty penny! 
That’s more than I can afford…
Low Prices → That’s a bargain! 
That’s cheap! 
That’s not half bad… 
L E S S O N 3
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
135
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
Shopping at a Fancy Store
U.S. Currency 
Salesperson – Excuse me. May I help you, ma’am?
Carla – Sure. I love this purple dress…Do you 
have it in size 12?
Salesperson – Yes, we do. Would you like to try it on?
Carla – Maybe…How much does it cost?
Salesperson – Eighty-five hundred dollars. 
Carla – Oh my, that’s expensive! Sorry, I’ll find 
something else… 
Salesperson – No problem, ma’am. Call me if you 
need any assistance.
ten dollars → neutral 
ten bucks → informal (slang)
:: STAY ALERT
B I L L SC O I N S
P E N N Y = 1 C E N T
D I M E = 1 0 C E N T S
N I C K E L = 5 C E N T S
Q U A R T E R = 2 5 C E N T S
V S .
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
136
L E S S O N 3
BASIC 3
L E S S O N 3
Verbs ending in –E 
Verbs ending in 
consonant + –Y
Other regular verbs
Drop
---
–Y
---
Add
–D
–IED
–ED
Examples
love – loved
spy – spied
open – opened
I, He, She, It
You, We, They
Verbs ending in voiced sounds: pronounce /d/
Verbs ending in voiceless sounds: pronounce /t/
Verbs ending in sounds /t/ and /d/: pronounce /ɪd/
Affirmative
Regular Verbs 
(–D / –ED / –IED)
Irregular Verb
To Be (Was/Were)
Negative
Did Not (Didn’t) + 
Bare Infinitive Verb
Did Not (Didn’t) + 
Bare Infinitive Verb
Was Not (Wasn’t)
Were Not (Weren’t)
Interrogative
Did + Subject + 
Bare Infinitive Verb
Did + Subject + 
Bare Infinitive Verb
Was/Were + Subject
Affirmative
was
were
Negative
was not (wasn’t)
were not (weren’t)
Interrogative
Was I, he, she, it...?
Were you, we, they...?
Simple Past → completed actions at a specific time in the past
Past Present
Regular Verbs—Affirmative Form—Spelling
Note that the pronunciation of regular verbs in the past varies according 
to the ending sound of the infinitive form.
Irregular Verbs 
Verb To Be 
SIMPLE PAST REVIEW
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
137
Other Verbs 
have – had think – thought go – went
take – took bring – brought come – came
do – did see – saw put – put
buy – bought spend – spent drive – drove
On Vacation
Carl – I’m having trouble deciding where to go 
 on my next vacation… 
Cindy – Well, last year, I went to Prague and I 
 totally recommend it! 
Carl – Really? What did you do there? 
Cindy – I walked the city to learn about its history, 
 went to the Prague Castle complex… 
Carl – Oh, what was the castle like? 
Cindy – It’s hard to explain, but I think you’ll love it!
Carl – OK, I’ll look into it. Thanks, Cindy.
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
:: COMMON MISTAKES
I N C O R R E C T
Did you went to Paris last year?
Paul bringed me a present for my birthday.
Did you were home last night?
C O R R E C T
Did you go to Paris last year?
Paul brought me a present for my birthday.
Were you home last night?
Check the list of irregular verbs in the past at the end of this Language Guide.
• Verb to be is an irregular verb with its own conjugation: I, He, She, It was / You, We, They were.
• Verb to be doesn’t take the auxiliary verb did to form the negative and interrogative forms: 
 I was You were
 I was not (wasn’t) You were not (weren’t)
 Was I…? Were you…?
Did you meet Alan yesterday? Yes, I did. / Yes, I met him yesterday.
Did you have lunch with Sammy last night? No, I didn’t. / No, I didn’t have lunch with Sammy last night.
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
138
L E S S O N 4
BASIC 3
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
How much…? → Uncountable Nouns
How many…? → Countable Nouns
How Much
How Much + Uncountable Noun (Singular Form) + 
Is There + Complement?
How much sugar is there in the pantry? 
• Questions
EXPRESSING QUANTITY
How Many
How Many + Countable Noun (Plural Form) + 
Are There + Complement?
How many eggs are there in the fridge? 
How Many + Countable Noun (Plural Form) + 
Do/Does + Subject + Main Verb?
How many hours does it take from Boston to 
New York? 
• Answers
Exact Amount
How much time do we have? You have two hours to finish the exam.
How many eggs are there in the fridge? There are six eggs in the fridge.
How Much + Uncountable Noun (Singular Form) + 
Do/Does + Subject + Main Verb?
How much time do we have?
Sentence Structure
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ibid
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
139
Used With Countable Nouns
Large Quantity or Amounts: Many / A lot of / Several / A bunch of / Dozens of / Tons of
How many eggs are there in the fridge? There are many eggs in the fridge.
 There are a lot of eggs in the fridge.
 There are a bunch of eggs in the fridge.
Enough Quantity: Some / A few
How many eggs are there in the fridge? There are some eggs in the fridge. (But it's enough.)
 There are a few eggs in the fridge. (But it's enough.)
Small Quantity (not enough): Few
How many eggs are there in the fridge? There are few eggs in the fridge. We need to get some more.
Used With Uncountable Nouns
Large Quantity or Amounts: Much (usually in negative sentences) / A lot of
How much time do we have? You have a lot of time.
 You don't have much time. Hurry!
Enough Quantity: Some / A little
How much time do we have? You have some time. (But it's enough.)
 You have a little time. (But it's enough.)
Small Quantity (not enough): Little
How much time do we have? You have little time. Hurry!
Quantifiers
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
Baking a Birthday Cake
Tracy – Honey, let's bake a birthday cake for your 
sister. Help me check if we have all the 
ingredients. How many eggs do we have?
Mel – Let' see...How many does it take?
Tracy – It takes six eggs.
Mel – OK, we have a few. It should be enough. 
What else?
Tracy – Butter, sugar, chocolate, and flour.
Mel – All right, we have a lot of butter and 
sugar here. There are a couple of cans of 
chocolate powder and some flour. Let's start, 
we don't have much time. She'll soon be 
back from school.
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
140
L E S S O N 4
BASIC 3
Neutral Quantifiers:
Many / Much / Few / A few / Little / A little / A lot of / Several / Dozens of / A couple of
Considered more informal and used mostly in spoken language:
A bunch / Tons of
:: COMMON MISTAKES
I N C O R R E C T
How many books you have?
I have very books.
C O R R E C T
How many books do you have?
I have many/a lot of/a bunch of books.
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
• How = Manner; In What State Or Condition
HOW OLD, HOW OFTEN, HOW FAR, HOW MUCH, AND HOW MANY
How are you?
I’m fine!
How do I send emails?
First, you need to have an email account.
:: STAY ALERT
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
141
The question word how can be combined with adverbs and that may change its meaning. 
Take a look at some possible uses:
• How Often = Frequency
How often do you take a shower?
I take a shower twice a day.
How often do you visit the doctor?
I visit the doctor four times a year. 
• How Long = Duration/Length 
How long does it take to go from Rio to 
São Paulo by bus? 
It takes six hours.
How long is the Champs Élysées?
It is 1.9 kilometers long. 
How far is Miami from Orlando? 
It’s 379.8 kilometers from Orlando.
How far do we have to run in the marathon? 
We have to run twenty-six miles.
• How Far = Distance
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
142
L E S S O N 4
BASIC 3
• How Much/How Many = Quantity
How Much → Uncountable Nouns
How Many → Countable Nouns 
How many cars do you have? I have one car.
How much bread do you eat every day? I eat some bread every day.
• How + Adjectives = To Which Extent/Degree
How tall are you? I’m 1.85…I’m not that tall. 
How high is the Empire State building? It’s 381 meters high. 
How thirsty are you? I’m not very thirsty.
How tired are you? Just a little. 
How early is it? It's at nine a.m.
There + To Be → Expresses Existence 
• Simple Present and Simple Past
Affirmative
Negative
Interrogative
Singular 
There is / There was
There is not / There was not
Is there...? / Was there...?
Plural
There are / There were
There are not / There were not
Are there...? / Were there...?
Josh – Lucas, how often do you come to this bar?
Lucas – Once a week. I love this place.
Josh – It’s nice for a couple of drinks.
Lucas – And it’s not far from home.
Josh – How far is it?
Lucas – Just one mile from here.
Josh – Cool! How long will we stay? 
Lucas – Until eleven. I have to be home by midnight.
L E S S O N 4
I N C O R R E C T
How long time do you study English?
How long is New York from New Jersey?
C O R R E C T
How long do you study English?
How far is New York from New Jersey?
Happy Hour
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
:: COMMON MISTAKES
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
THERE + TO BE: PRESENT AND PAST
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
143
What is there in those boxes? Is there a drugstore nearby?
Hello, is there a Mindy Sabo here?
Last summer, there were many music festivals in Alamo Park.
Ma'am, there was a problem with your credit card. 
Do you have another one?
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
Natural Disasters
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
144
L E S S O N 4
BASIC 3
Michael – Honey, there was a tornado in Saint Louis. Did you see the news?
Sandra – Yes, I saw it. It was terrible. There are dozens of families who lost everything.
Michael – Is there anything we can do to help?
Sandra – I guess...I heard there is a bank account for donations.
Michael – Good. I'll check it out.
When we use There + To Be in the present:
There’s a problem with the computer. → Contraction OK → Spoken and Informal Language
There is a problem with the computer. → No Contraction → Written and/or Formal Language 
There are problems with the computer. → Contractions Are Not Possible 
When we use There + To Be in the past, we do not use contractions.
:: STAY ALERT
:: COMMON MISTAKES
I N C O R R E C T
Had a tornado in Saint Louis.
There was a lot of people protesting on 
the street.
C O R R E C T
There was a Tornado in Saint Louis.
There were a lot of people protesting on 
the street.
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
USED TO
The modal expression used to describes a past 
habit: something you regularly did in the past but 
you don't do anymore. It canalso refer to a state 
or situation that is no longer true.
Sentence Structure
Affirmative
Subject + Used To + Verb + Complement → I used to go to school in the morning as a kid.
Negative
Subject + Didn't + Use To + Verb + Complement → I didn't use to like bananas as a kid. Now I do. 
Interrogative
Did + Subject + Use To + Verb + Complement → Did you use to live here?
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
145
R E V I E W
:: LANGUAGE IN ACTION
In order to talk about your background, you can use:
• Simple Past For actions that started and ended in the past
• Simple Present → For your current professional experience, present work/study routine
• Present Continuous → For things you are currently doing
• Time Expressions About the Present and Past → To locate your activities in time
• Expressions that Show Sequence → To connect and organize events in a chronological sequence
• Adverbs of Frequency → To express the number of times you do an activity
Let’s see how these structures work in context?
HOW TO TALK ABOUT YOUR BACKGROUND
If you want to describe past repeated actions or a state or situation that is not true anymore, you will use the 
modal expression used to. 
In the negative and interrogative forms the main verb use goes back to its base form:
I used to play with my sister here when I was a child. (Affirmative)
I didn't use to play here when I was a child. It was dangerous. (Negative)
Did you use to live here as a child? (Interrogative)
:: STAY ALERT
:: COMMON MISTAKES
I N C O R R E C T
Did you used to live here as a child?
C O R R E C T
Did you use to live here as a child?
Childhood Memories
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
Donna – Wow! I can't believe you found these toys! 
 I used to love this doll. 
Tony – I know. You used to call her Maggie. 
Donna – How do you remember that?
Tony – Well…I used to hide it from you all the 
 time, and you used to cry to Mom: 
 "Maggie is missing."
Donna – Right! Because you used to be a mean 
 brother!
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
146
L E S S O N 5
BASIC 3
L E S S O N 5
R E V I E W
BASIC 3
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
BASIC CONNECTORS: AND, BUT, SO, OR
Informal Conversations Job Interviews College Interviews
And 
+
But 
≠
So 
=
Or
×
Here are the elements we have in this part of Gaby’s routine:
• Simple Past: I graduated at Compte School of Math... / I got a job at ABC Bank and worked there... 
• Present Continuous: Are you working...? / I am doing consulting work… / I’m looking for something permanent.
• Time Expressions About the Present and Past: two years ago, until last year, at the moment
• Expressions that Show Sequence: then 
Let’s see other possible sentences you can use to talk about your background.
I have experience in... 
I have a degree in accounting/law/medicine...
I have a master's in... / I have a PhD in... 
Some situations in which you can talk about your background are: 
Tell us about 
your education 
and professional 
experience.
Are you working 
at the moment?
I graduated at Compte School of 
Math two years ago. Then, I got 
a job at ABC Bank and worked 
there until last year.
I am doing remote consulting work 
at ABC Bank still, but I’m looking 
for something permanent.
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
147
• Position in a Sentence
Sentence or Information 1 + BUT + Sentence or 
Information 2 → Jack loves coffee but not milk. 
Sentence or information 1 + SO + Conclusion → 
Leah has lactose intolerance, so she doesn’t drink milk. 
Sentence or information 1 + OR + Sentence or 
Information 2 → Mike drinks coffee or milk. 
Sentence or Information 1 + AND + Sentence or 
Information 2 → Tina loves coffee and milk.
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
Nick – Julie, do you want some wine? 
Julie – Oh, no. I’ll have grape juice. I love 
grapes, but I don’t really like wine. 
Nick – Oh, OK...grape juice then. What do 
we order? Spaghetti or lasagna?
Julie – I don’t eat meat, so I’ll have the 
vegetarian lasagna. 
Nick – I’ll have that too. For dessert? 
Julie – I’ll have chocolate ice cream, 
chocolate pudding, and an apple 
crumble. 
Nick – Wow...you really like dessert. 
At Dinner
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
148
L E S S O N 5
BASIC 3
L E S S O N 5
An Interview 
Reporter – What do you think about the 
elections? 
Hugo – I think it’s our chance to 
make a difference. 
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
What do you think about...?
What is your opinion about...? 
GIVING AND ASKING OPINION
• Asking Opinion 
• Giving Opinion 
Negative Opinion: Positive Opinion:
I N C O R R E C T
What you think about abortion?
C O R R E C T
What do you think about abortion?
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
:: COMMON MISTAKES
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
149
Expressing Sequence 
Excuse me, 
how I can get to 
Storm Road?
Take the next street to 
your left, then go ahead.
• Giving Directions
Go straight ahead 
Turn left / Make a left
Don’t stop
Take the bus...
Keep going
Get off at...
Turn right / Make a right
Cross the street
Expressions
Then...
After that... 
At the end... 
Before... 
When someone is lost, they need directions. 
GIVING DIRECTIONS
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
150
L E S S O N 5
BASIC 3
L E S S O N 5
Looking for a Station 
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
John – Excuse me, ma’am. How can I get to the 
 nearest subway station?
Martha – It’s not too far. Go straight ahead and then 
 take the first street on the left. Walk one 
 block,cross the street, and turn right. You’ll 
 see the station from there. 
John – Thank you, ma'am!
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
• Requests
Favor 
May I + Verb in the Bare Infinitive + Complement? 
→ May I talk to you for a second? 
Can I + Verb in the Bare Infinitive + Complement? 
→ Can I come in? 
Could you + Verb in the Bare Infinitive + Complement? 
→ Could you stop screaming, please? 
MAKING REQUESTS AND OFFERS
Can you + Verb in the Bare Infinitive + Complement? 
→ Can you open the door for me, please?
Permission
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
151
Could I + Verb in the Bare Infinitive + Complement? 
→ Could I drink some water, Mrs. Pineda? 
• Offers 
Would you like + Complement? → Would you like a cup of coffee? 
To accept the offer, you can say: 
Yes, I would. 
Yes, please. 
Sure. Thanks. 
To refuse the offer, you can say: 
No, thanks. Maybe later.
No, thanks. I’m OK, really.
John – Good morning, could I speak to Dr. Smith?
Dana – He is busy right now. 
John – Can I wait here for a few minutes?
Dana – Sure. Take a seat. Would you like some water? 
John – Sure. Thank you. 
When requesting permission, it is more common to use may with I and we.
May I come in? → Correct and commonly used.
May she come in? → Correct but not commonly used.
:: STAY ALERT
I N C O R R E C T
Would you to like some water?
C O R R E C T
Would you like some water?
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
At the Doctor’s Office
:: COMMON MISTAKES
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
152
L E S S O N 5
BASIC 3
L E S S O N 5
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
Father and Son
Barry – Dad, will you lend me fifty bucks? 
Paul – Sorry, dude, not this time. 
Barry – Why not? 
Paul – Because it is the third time you ask me for 
 money this month. 
Barry – But I need the money. 
Paul – Why? 
Barry – Because I want to go out with my friends. 
• Why + Verb To Be 
Structure: Why + Verb To Be + Subject + Complement?
 Why are you tired?
• Why + Simple Present 
Structure: Why + Do/Does + Subject + Verb (Bare Infinitive) + Complement?
 Why do you wake up early? 
• Why + Present Continuous
 Why + Is/Are + Subject + Verb (–ING Form) + Complement?
 Why are we walking to work?
• Why + Simple Past 
Structure: Why + Did + Subject + Verb (Bare Infinitive) + Complement?
 Why did Mary sell her house?
• Because...
Question with Why → Answer with Because
Why are you tired? 
Because I worked all day. 
Why → What is the reason for... 
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
:: COMMON MISTAKES
I N C O R R E C T
Because are you going home?
C O R R E C T
Why are you going home?
QUESTION WORD: WHY
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
153
L E S S O N 5L E S S O N 6
Asking for Opinion
Questions
What + Verb To Be + Subject + Complement
What is your opinion about Las Vegas?
What + Auxiliary Verb + Subject + Main Verb + Complement
What do you think about Las Vegas?
Indirect Questions
Verb in the Imperative + Your Opinion About + Complement
Tell me your opinion about Las Vegas.
Giving Opinion
Subject + Verb (That) + Complement
I think that it's a great city.
I guess it's too messy.
I believe that I'll like it there.
Structure
Weekend Getaway
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
Lisa – Baby, what do you think about going to Vegas on the weekend?
Mark – I think traveling is always a great idea! But Vegas? I don't know...I think it's a bit messy, don't you?
Lisa – I don't think so. I really believe it will be fun!
Mark – OK, then. Vegas it is! Let's look for some hotel deals for the weekend.
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
GIVING AND ASKING OPINION
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
154
L E S S O N 6
BASIC 3
Possessive Case 
→ These are Laura’s toys. / This is Jonas’s backpack.
Owner + ’s + Noun
• Use
 → Possessive Case
Expressing Possession → Possessive Adjectives
 → Possessive Pronouns
• Structure
Possessive Case
• Expressing Possession—Proper Nouns
EXPRESSING POSSESSION
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
I N C O R R E C T
Do you think it's too late? I think no.
Do you think it's too early? I think yes.
C O R R E C T
Do you think it's too late? I don't think so.
Do you think it's too early? I think so. / I think it is.
• Expressing Possession—Plural Nouns Ending in –S
Possessive Case → These are the girls’ dresses.
Owner + ’ + Noun
:: COMMON MISTAKES
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
155
Possessive Adjectives and Possessive Pronouns
Possessive Adjective → These are her toys. Possessive Pronoun → These (toys) are hers.
Possessive Pronoun → This (backpack) is his.Possessive Adjective → This is his backpack.
Possessive Adjective → These are their dresses. Possessive Pronoun → These (dresses) are theirs.
Possessive Adjective + Noun Noun is implicit
Noun is implicitPossessive Adjective + Noun
Possessive Adjective + Noun Noun is implicit 
Looking for Daniel’s Wallet
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
Daniel – Honey, did you see my wallet?
Elza – I saw a brown wallet in the living room. 
 Look. Is it yours?
Daniel – No. This is Thomas’s wallet. Mine is black. 
Oh, forget it! It’s in my bag.
Elza – Like father, like son. Daniel, you and Thomas have to 
take better care of your things. 
I N C O R R E C T
This is the Lucia’s book.
Girls, are these yours dresses?
C O R R E C T
This is Lucia’s book.
Girls, are these dresses yours?
Girls, are these your dresses?
QUESTION WORDS: HOW AND WHY
How old
much
often
far
many
long
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
:: COMMON MISTAKES
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
9610
/9
8.
156
L E S S O N 6
BASIC 3
L E S S O N 6
• Structure
How / How far / How old / How long / How often / Why
Question Word (Adverb) + Verb To Be + Subject
How old are you?
Question Word (Adverb) + Auxiliary Verb + Subject + Main Verb
How long does you class last?
How Many 
How Many + Countable Noun (Plural Form) + Are There + Complement
How many students are there in the class?
How Many + Countable Noun (Plural Form) + Do/Does + Subject + Main Verb
How many books do you need?
How Much
How Much + Uncountable Noun (Singular Form) + Is There + Complement
How much sugar is there in this recipe?
How Much + Uncountable Noun (Singular Form) + Do/Does + Subject + Main Verb
How much time do you need?
• How + Adverb
• Why
Why → Asking for a Reason → Why do you have to go?
Answer: Because I have work to do.
How → Manner How Much/Many → Quantity 
How Long → Duration How Often → Frequency 
How Far → Distance 
How Old → Age 
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
157
Family Hike
Mother – How are you feeling, guys?
Fred – I'm tired, mom!
Donna – Me too...How far are we from home?
Father – Not very far, about half a mile.
Fred – Half a mile? How long is that?
Father – About ten minutes. But I have an idea... 
 Hop on!
Donna – That was a great idea, daddy! Why 
 didn't you think of that a mile ago?
:: COMMON MISTAKES
I N C O R R E C T
How often you study English?
Because are you working?
C O R R E C T
How often do you study English?
Why are you working?
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
Simple Past 
Used to describe an action that happened at a specific moment in the past.
Used To + Verb
Used to describe past repeated actions, or a state or situation that is not true anymore.
USED TO VS. SIMPLE PAST
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
Structure—Simple Past
Affirmative Subject + Verb in the Past + Complement
Negative Subject + Didn’t + Verb in the Infinitive + Complement
Interrogative Did + Subject + Verb in the Infinitive + Complement
Structure—Used to
Affirmative Subject + Used to + Verb in the Infinitive + Complement
Negative Subject + Didn’t + Use to + Verb in the Infinitive + Complement
Interrogative Did + Subject + Use to + Verb in the Infinitive + Complement
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
158
L E S S O N 6
BASIC 3
L E S S O N 6
I used to drive to work, but nowadays I take the subway.
I really miss going to the beach. When I lived in Los Angeles, I used to go to the beach every weekend.
Used to—Used to 
refer to a past habit.
Simple Present— 
Used to refer to a fact.
Simple Present—Used to refer to routine.
Simple Past—Used to refer to 
a specific moment in the past.
Used to—Used to refer to 
a past repeated action.
I usually drive to work, but yesterday I took the subway.
Simple Present— 
Used to refer to routine.
Simple Past—Used to describe an 
action that happened at a specific 
moment in the past.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
I N C O R R E C T
I used to study French last year.
I worked out but now I swim.
C O R R E C T
I studied French last year.
I used to work out but now I swim.
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
Summer Break
Dayse – Hi, Sonia! How was the holiday break?
Sonia – Hey, Dayse! It was great. I went to Florida with 
 my family.
Dayse – I love Florida. When I was a kid we used to live 
 in Georgia, which is very close to Florida. So 
 my parents used to take us to Florida every 
 summer vacation.
Sonia – It’s really nice. It was my first time there.
In the negative and interrogative forms of used to, the main verb goes 
back to its base form.
The kids didn't use to like vegetables. Now, they love it. 
The kids didn’t like the dish I prepared for dinner.
Did you use to eat vegetables as a child?
Did you eat dinner?
:: STAY ALERT
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
160
INTERMEDIATE 1
L E S S O N 1
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
Giving Opinion → Positive Opinion
 → Negative Opinion
 → Neutral Opinion 
• Asking for Opinion
• Introducing Opinion
• Agreeing 
Agreeing = To have the same opinion as somebody else.
What do you think about...? 
What is your opinion about...? 
What is your take on…? 
Do you think that…?
I think (that)...
I guess (that)...
I’d say (that)...
I suppose (that)...
From my point of view...
In my opinion,...
I agree with you. 
I agree that... 
I have the same opinion.
I couldn’t agree more. 
That’s exactly what I think.
What do you think about this dress?
Which dress 
do you think is 
best for me?
Coffee is a 
perfect drink.
I think the 
blue one suits 
you perfectly!
I couldn’t 
agree more. 
I love coffee.
Well, I guess 
that the pink 
one is very 
pretty.
GIVING OPINION: AGREEING AND DISAGREEING / 
ASKING AND INTRODUCING OPINION
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
161
• Disagreeing 
Disagreeing = To have a different or completely opposite opinion.
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
Debating Solutions
Mr. Rickman – Our company is going through a 
 crisis. I think that we need to cut costs 
 by firing people. 
Mrs. Stuart – I agree that we have to cut costs. But 
 I disagree that firing people is the solution.
Mr. Rickman – What do you think we should do, then?
Mrs. Stuart – I guess that we need to train people to 
 improve our performance.
Mr. Rickman – I beg to differ...we don’t have the money 
 for that!
I don't agree... 
I disagree... 
I have a different opinion... 
I beg to differ... 
I don’t think so...
Promoting 
Thomas is a 
great idea!
I disagree. 
He is too 
irresponsible.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
I N C O R R E CT
In my point of view, home office is the future.
C O R R E CT
From my point of view, home office is the future.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
GIVING OPINION: FILLERS AND EXPRESSIONS
Fillers → Used in spoken language only (or informal internet conversations) 
→ Carry no meaning 
→ Used to make a pause in speech 
→ May indicate the speaker is choosing which wordsto use 
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
162
L E S S O N 1
INTERMEDIATE 1
Pay attention to the expressions in bold in the sentences.
You know, I think people need to invest in organizations that protect the environment. 
Let me tell you something, the government has a responsibility to its people.
The point is, most politicians forget their principles eventually.
Some things about law are, you know, complicated for the ordinary citizen. 
I know...You’re always here to help.
It’s like...society works in cooperation, I believe.
My opinion about the situation in Africa...how can I put this...it’s historical and hard to solve. 
I don’t think that forbidding drugs is the solution to violence, you know? 
Hmm…I don’t really agree because people also have responsibilities. 
The thing is that when there is a lot of money involved, I guess people go crazy.
I see…but don’t you think that people must obey the law?
Well, I’d say that politicians should do good but it doesn’t always happen.
Yeah...I guess you’re right. 
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
Talking About the Environment
Julia – Chad, don’t you think there are enough trees in this 
garden?
Chad – Well…I don’t think so. 
Julia – We can barely walk in here. Trees are important, you know, 
but we need to be able to walk. 
Chad – Julia, the thing is that there isn’t such a thing as too many 
trees. We need them. 
Julia – Hmm…I know that. But there’s a limit.
Chad – Let me tell you something, why don’t you use the other 
entrance and leave the trees be and produce our oxygen?
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
163
MODAL VERB: WILL
Will → Used to refer to decisions made at the moment of speaking.
 → Used to refer to predictions based on opinion.
The modal verb Will is commonly used to refer to future events. It expresses the idea of inevitability.
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
• Negative
Structure: Subject + Will Not / Won’t + Verb in Bare Infinitive + Complement
 Mark will not travel this year. 
• Interrogative 
Structure: Will + Subject + Verb in Bare Infinitive + Complement
 Will Joe eat at home? 
Structure: Subject + Will/’ll + Verb in Bare Infinitive + Complement
 Julia will organize the party.
• Affirmative
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
164
L E S S O N 1
INTERMEDIATE 1
:: COMMON MISTAKES
I N C O R R E CT
Peter will to work tomorrow.
Mary will goes to the beach this weekend.
C O R R E CT
Peter will work tomorrow.
Mary will go to the beach this weekend.
In order to understand time references in the future, consider the following information:
Today is Tuesday, August 1st, 2017.
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
On the Phone
Mary – Hello?
Tom – Hi, Mary, it’s Tom. 
Mary – Hi, Tom! How are you?
Tom – Pretty well, thank you. Listen, will you come 
for dinner? 
Mary – Oh, I’m afraid I won’t. But Kim and Kate will. 
Tom – Wonderful! Tell them we will serve dinner at 
eight p.m., OK? 
Mary – I’ll do it. Bye!
TIME EXPRESSIONS ABOUT THE FUTURE
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
:: STAY ALERT
I will do it.
I will not go there.
formal or emphatic spoken or informal languageI’ll do it.
I won’t go there.
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
165
• Use
When means at the moment. While means during the time.
Tomorrow, I’ll go to Susan’s party.
One year from now, I’ll move to New York.
In 2019, I’ll get married to Susan.
Time expressions references for the future:
Tomorrow
Susan’s party is tomorrow. Susan’s party is tomorrow afternoon.
Susan’s party is tomorrow morning. Susan’s party is tomorrow evening. 
In + year = In 2019 / In 2030
(Number) days/months/years from now = Two days from now / Three years from now
Next = next week/month/year
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
Planning a Meeting 
Mrs. Baker – Sandra, let’s plan the general meeting. 
Sandra – Sure, ma’am. When will it be? 
Mrs. Baker – It will be next Tuesday, September 4th at two p.m. 
Sandra – Wonderful. Until what time? 
Mrs. Baker – Until five p.m. Don’t forget to order some items 
 for the coffee break tomorrow morning 
 and, in the afternoon, send the emails to the 
 heads of the department.
Sandra – OK. Consider it done. 
L E S S O N 2
CONNECTORS: WHEN AND WHILE
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
WHEN WHILE
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
166
L E S S O N 2
INTERMEDIATE 1
• Structure
When → Simple Past + Simple Past
 Simple Past + Past Continuous
Sam left when we finished the meeting.
When Julia arrived, the baby was sleeping. 
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
Household Chores
Valerie – Yesterday, while my son was vacuuming, my daughter was ironing the clothes. My husband was 
 cleaning the yard while I was shopping for groceries. We share the domestic chores in my house.
Michelle – That's great. My husband and I do everything together. Yesterday, we cleaned and cooked in the 
 morning. When we finished, we did the dishes together.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
I N C O R R E CT
While I woke up, my sister was cooking.
I didn't know when was she traveling.
C O R R E CT
When I woke up, my sister was cooking.
I didn't know when she was traveling.
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
Subtle → You give opinion almost as a suggestion.
Emphatic → You give opinion in a less flexible way.
Giving Opinion 
There are expressions that may be used to indicate these ways to give opinion:
GIVING OPINION: BEING SUBTLE AND EMPHATIC
While → Past Continuous + Past Continuous
 Past Continuous + Simple Past
Mike was preparing breakfast while I was taking a 
shower.
While I was taking care of the baby, Mike did the laundry.
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ãoto
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
167
• Being Emphatic 
Being emphatic means that you want your opinion to 
be noticed and to be seen as strong. In order to be 
emphatic, you can use some expressions.
I kind of think that the 
other dress suits you best. 
I really don’t think you should 
be texting in the classroom.
I tend to believe that exercise alone isn’t enough to 
lose weight. 
I probably agree with the idea of taking two vacation 
terms in a year. 
I guess that maybe living in the city is more exciting.
I would say that living on your own is liberating. 
• Being Subtle
Subtlety implies something that isn’t obvious 
and sometimes even hard to identify. So, to 
give your opinion subtly you can distance 
yourself by using some expressions.
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
168
L E S S O N 2
INTERMEDIATE 1
I do believe that it is OK for a student to have a 
part-time job. 
I definitely believe that people have to take care of 
the environment. 
I strongly believe that the government must be 
more just. 
I really think that nature is important for human life.
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
Family Feud
Leo – Mary, this is not a debate. 
I do believe you need to 
spend more time at home.
Mary – But dad...I have college stuff 
to do, and I like to hang out 
with my friends. I guess that 
maybe you’re overreacting. 
Leo – Oh, really? Ask your mother. 
She says she only sees you 
on weekends.
Mary – OK, I’ll try to spend more 
time at home. 
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
169
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
• Use
Actions in progress during a period of time in the past.
• Structure
Emphasis on duration: Lia was studying from seven to eleven a.m.
Interrupted action: I was taking a shower when you called.
Simultaneous actions in progress in the past: I was cooking dinner and my husband was taking care of the baby.
PAST CONTINUOUS
past present
Affirmative: Subject + Verb To Be in the Past + Main 
Verb in –ING Form + Complement 
She was having breakfast when you 
called.
Negative: Subject + Verb To Be in the Past + Not + 
Main Verb in –ING Form + Complement 
I wasn't watching videos, I was studying.
Interrogative: Subject + Verb To Be in the Past + 
Not + Main Verb in –ING Form + 
Complement 
Were you working yesterday in the 
evening?
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
170
L E S S O N 2
INTERMEDIATE 1
:: COMMON MISTAKES
I N C O R R E CT
I was calling her at ten a.m.
My wife was working and I cooking dinner.
C O R R E CT
I called her at ten a.m.
My wife was working and I was cooking dinner.
Mother – Hi, honey. How was your day?
Son – Not good, mom. I have to tell you something...I 
broke the window. 
Mother – What? How did it happen?
Son – The boys and I were playing soccer outside and...
Mother – Wait a minute! You weren't studying, you were 
playing with the boys and you broke the window...
Is that what you are saying?
Son – I'm sorry, mom. I really am. But in my defense, I 
was studying from two to five. 
Mother – We'll see about that when I get your grade on 
tomorrow's exam. Now, go to your room.
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
TIME EXPRESSIONS IN A NARRATIVE
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
Past
Present
Future
Time Expressions
Broken Window
Yesterday, when I was going
to work, I met Elza.
It was great to see her.
I’ll call her later today.
So we can have dinner
together next week.
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
171
• Structure
Time expressions are used either at the end or at the beginning of sentences in a narrative.
We also use expressions to help us sequence our narration. 
These expressions may be used in the beginning of sentences.
When = at the time
Yesterday, I went to the movies with Paul.
Mary and I went to the movies yesterday.
My husband and I are moving to New York next year.
I’m working right now. Can we talk later?
When I arrive at home later today, I’ll help you with 
the homework. After that, we can go to the mall.
While they were having dinner, it started to snow.
While = During the time
Past
In the summer / the winter / 1970
Last week/month/year
Yesterday
Two days/months/years ago
At that moment
Some time ago
Present
(Right) now
At the/this moment
Currently
Nowadays
Today
Future
Next week/month/year/Monday/Tuesday/weekend
Later 
Tomorrow
By the end of the day/week/month
Tomorrow morning/afternoon/evening
Two days/months/years from now
Sequencing
(Right) After that Before that
Then When While
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
172
L E S S O N 2
INTERMEDIATE 1
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
Family Tale
Helen – How did you meet daddy, mom?
Anne – It was in the summer of 1997 and we were 
 both taking our undergraduate studies. He 
 came to talk to me about the class during 
 the break. I think it was just an excuse, but 
 it worked because just one week later we 
 were dating.
Helen – How long after that did you get married?
Anne – We got married in March 2000.
Helen – That’s right, it’s your anniversary next month.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
I N C O R R E CT
They arrived in last week.
They will arrive in next week.
C O R R E CT
They arrived last week.
They will arrive next week.
When you know the exact quantity of something, you can use numbers. But when you don’t, you need to use 
expressions that relate to countable and uncountable nouns.
• Some and Any
L E S S O N 3
EXPRESSING QUANTITY: REVIEW
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
COUNTABLE NOUNS
Question: How many?
Quantifiers:
A lot of → Very large quantity
Many → Large quantity
A few → Small but sufficient quantity
Few → Small and not sufficient quantity
Professions
Physician / Biologist / IT analyst / Journalist / 
Human Resources Specialist / Singer / Surgeon / 
Fashion Designer / Driver / Chef / Accountant
UNCOUNTABLE NOUNS
Question: How much?
Quantifiers:
A lot of → Very large quantity
Much → Large quantity(commonly used in the negative)
A little → Small but sufficient quantity
Little → Small and not sufficient quantity
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
173
There are some professions in the group. (Not all, but part of the professions there are.)
There aren’t any companies in the group. (There is not one company, at all.)
• Other Ways to Express Quantity 
Lots of / A bunch of → Similar to “a lot of” but more informal.
There’s a bunch of people in the concert. 
Several → Similar to “many.”
There are several career options one can 
choose from. 
Plenty of → A quantity that is rather large and sufficient.
Tony has plenty of work to do, he doesn’t need any 
more courses. 
Some = A part of a group → Commonly used in negative or interrogative sentences
Any = Complete absence → Commonly used in negative for this idea
:: STAY ALERT
Some → Refers to a part of the whole
I love some classic music.
Any → Refers to the whole, either for presence or absence
I like any classic music. (all classic music)
I don’t like any classic music. (none)
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
174
L E S S O N 3
INTERMEDIATE 1
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
Job Hunt 
Lia – Here, Jake. Look at the ad, there are plenty 
 of placements for interns. 
Jake – Let me see...oh, many of them are very far. 
 What do I do?
Lia – You can go on some interviews, learn how 
 the process works. 
Jake – Do you think so? 
Lia – Yeah, you have nothing to lose.
• Structure
• Can
Present Ability
Mario can swim very well. 
(Mario is able to swim very well.) 
Informal Permission and Request
Katy – Dad, can I borrow your car? (Do you let me 
borrow your car?)
Paul – Yes, you can. (Yes, I permit.)
Note: When using Can to make requests, you expect the answer to be “yes.”
MODAL VERBS: CAN AND COULD
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
Affirmative
Subject + Can + Verb 
(Bare Infinitive)
Subject + Could + Verb 
(Bare Infinitive)
Negative
Subject + Cannot / Can’t + 
Verb (Bare Infinitive)
Subject + Could not / Couldn’t + 
Verb (Bare Infinitive)
Interrogative
Can + Subject + Verb 
(Bare Infinitive)
Could + Subject + Verb 
(Bare Infinitive)
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
175
Possibility 
Let’s grab something to eat? We can have a 
sandwich or a proper meal. (It’s possible for us 
to have...) 
• Could
Past Ability 
I miss my teens. I could sleep until late then, but now I 
have to work early. (I was able to sleep until late…)
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
Elliot – Dave, can you help me translate this email?
Dave – That depends. Which language is it? 
Elliot – It’s French. 
Dave – Oh, I could understand French well, but 
I forgot most of it. 
Elliot – Are you kidding? 
Dave – I’m not! Out of practice, you know. We could 
try with a dictionary.
Asking for Help
:: COMMON MISTAKES
I N C O R R E CT
Larry can to drive us there. 
Joan can draw when she was a kid. 
Mark can not leave early. 
C O R R E CT
Larry can drive us there. 
Joan could draw when she was a kid.
Mark cannot leave early.
Remote Possibility
I’ll negotiate with Mr. Dickinson, maybe he could 
extend the deadline. (There’s a slight chance he will...)
Polite Permission and Request
Mr. Sparrow, could I arrive a little later tomorrow? 
(Would it be possible for me to arrive a little later…?)
Note: When using Could to make requests, you 
have no idea what the answer will be. 
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
176
L E S S O N 3
INTERMEDIATE 1
First person
Second person
Third person
Singular
I
You
He / She / It
Plural
We
You
They
Pronouns → Substitute nouns or noun phrases, as in: 
John loves Sarah. He wants to marry her.
He = John
her = Sarah
• Subject Pronouns: Function as the subject of a sentence; they come before verbs. 
• Object Pronouns: Function as the object of a sentence; they usually come after verbs and/or prepositions.
• Possessive Pronouns: Substitute a reference of possession previously mentioned. 
• Reflexive Pronouns: Used when the subject and the object of the verb refer to the same person/thing.
If I were in your shoes, I would wait a while before investing all my money. 
• Modals, Semi-modals, and Modal Expressions 
It is very common to resort to modality to express advice. There are a few structures you can use to this end.
PRONOUN REVIEW AND REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
First person
Second person
Third person
Singular
Myself
Yourself
Himself / Herself / Itself
Plural
Ourselves
Yourselves
Themselves
First person
Second person
Third person
Singular
Me
You
Him / Her / It
Plural
Us
You
Them
First person
Second person
Third person
Singular
Mine
Yours
His / Hers / Its
Plural
Ours
Yours
Theirs
Johnny is looking at himself in the mirror. 
 (Johnny)
S U B J E C T
O B J E C T
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
177
The simple past and the past continuous can appear together, even though they are very different. 
• Simple Past vs. Past Continuous 
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
SIMPLE PAST VS. PAST CONTINUOUS
Simple Past
Single action completed at a point in the past.
Affirmative Form: Regular and Irregular verbs
Negative Form: Auxiliary Didn’t + Verb
Interrogative Form: Auxiliary Did + Subj. + Verb
Past Continuous
 
Action that was in progress for a while in the past.
Affirmative Form: To Be (past) + Verb in –ING
Negative Form: To Be (past neg.) + Verb in –ING
Interrogative Form: To Be + Subj. + Verb in –ING
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
At the Psychologist
Pam – So, Julian, why are you here? 
Julian – I think I’m crazy, doc. 
Pam – Hmm, and why do you consider yourself 
crazy? 
Julian – Because I have conversations with myself...
Pam – But that is not crazy...lots of people do that. 
Julian – Really? What a relief!
:: STAY ALERT
I don’t need help. I can do it. → Neutral
I don’t need help. I can do it myself. → Emphatic
:: COMMON MISTAKES
I N C O R R E CT
I cut me with a knife.
Listen to myself! You are being stupid.
C OR R E CT
I cut myself with a knife.
Listen to me! / Listen to yourself! You are being stupid.
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
178
L E S S O N 4
INTERMEDIATE 1
L E S S O N 3
• Case 2: An action was in progress until another action happened. 
Connectors
It is important to notice that in these cases there are two sentences linked by a connector. 
Some connectors used are:
Nick was doing his homework before you arrived. 
 
Henry was taking a shower when his girlfriend called. 
 
Lyla was taking a shower when Michael called. 
Lia was drinking coffee until her boyfriend arrived
Continuous Action present
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
Talking About an Accident 
Joan – Oh my god, Peter! How are you? What happened? 
Peter – There was fire in my house but nothing serious. 
Joan – Oh, my! But do you know where it started? 
Peter – I was taking a shower when the fire started so I just 
had time to run. Mia was cooking dinner and noticed 
something burning, so she called the firefighters. 
Joan – Is the house safe? 
Peter – Yeah…we’re insured. We have to wait for the police 
to conclude the investigation and then we can start 
the repair.
• Case 1: One action in progress interrupted another action. 
Continuous Action present
Lyla set the table while Mia was preparing the dessert. 
 
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
179
L E S S O N 4
Giving Opinion → Certainty → You are absolutely sure of what you’re saying.
 → Doubt → You aren’t sure of what you’re saying.
• Expressing Doubt
When you are not really sure of something but still want to 
speak your mind, here are some expressions you can use:
I am sure (that)...
I am positive that...
I am quite sure...
I am pretty sure...
I am certain that...
I am almost sure that...
There is no doubt about that...
For sure (used in the end of sentences, 
not in the beginning)
I am not sure that...
I don’t know exactly...
I could/might be wrong but...
Well, I might + Verb...
Well, I could + Verb… 
Maybe… 
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
GIVING OPINION: EXPRESSING CERTAINTY AND DOUBT
I am sure that this partnership will be successful.
I am not sure that this project 
is complete...what do I do?
• Expressing Certainty 
When you are talking about something you are sure of, 
you can use some expressions to introduce your opinion.
You know...
Let me tell you something...
Hm... 
...like... (used in the middle of sentences)
Yeah...
Well...
I see...
You see...
The point is...
The thing is...
• Fillers
Fillers are words without meaning that are used to make 
pauses and think about how to continue your speech. 
Here are some fillers: 
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
180
L E S S O N 4
INTERMEDIATE 1
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
Debating a Project
Hugh – Lilian, what do you think about Lionel’s idea for the 
project? 
Lilian – Well, we might have some problems there. 
Hugh – I’m sure you have another idea, then...
Lilian – Hm...not exactly. I am positive that we need to control 
the budget and still deliver the project, but how?
Hugh – So, think about it. I could be wrong but this is a good 
chance for you to impress the director.
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
Must is a modal verb, which is used to modify the meaning of verbs.
• Must
Obligation (internal) → The speaker perceives the action as mandatory.
Affirmative Form
Have To Must
Negative Form
Have To ≠ Must
Affirmative
Subject + Must + Verb (to) 
Negative
Subject + Must Not (Mustn’t) + 
Verb (to) (different meaning)
Interrogative 
Must + Subject + Verb (to)
We must teach our children to respect everybody.
MODAL VERB MUST AND HAVE TO
Semi-modals modify the meaning of verbs but take 
a different sentence structure from modal verbs.
Have To is a semi-modal →
Note: Mustn’t (the negative form of Must) expresses prohibition.
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
181
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
Planning the Weekend
Cindy – Hey, Harry. Let’s travel this weekend?
Harry – No no no…I have to do some research for 
 my master’s dissertation. 
Cindy – But you just have to deliver it six months 
 from now…
Harry – Cindy, the company is paying for the course 
and Mr. Johnson told me I have to pass or 
I won’t get a promotion.
Cindy – OK…but you don’t have to sacrifice your 
 whole life! I mean, just one weekend? 
 Come on…
• Have To 
Obligation (external) → The speaker perceives the action as mandatory because it is an order, a command, 
or a law to be followed.
Note: In the negative form—do not (don’t) have to or does not (doesn’t) have to—the meaning is “it is not 
necessary.”
The director gave the order, so I have to check the archives first.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
I N C O R R E CT
She have to do her job.
I really want to pass, so I have study.
C O R R E CT
She has to do her job.
I really want to pass, so I have to study.
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
182
L E S S O N 4
INTERMEDIATE 1
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
• Structure
• Must (Obligation) 
Gillian must check her work emails every day. (= It is mandatory that Gillian do that.)
• Mustn’t (Prohibition)
Mike mustn’t hire an assistant without the CEO’s permission. (= Mike is prohibited/
forbidden to hire without permission.)
• Should (Advice/Recommendation)
Steve should prepare the report in advance to avoid being late. (= It is advised/
recommended that Steve do that.)
MODAL VERBS (MUST AND SHOULD)
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
Planning a Branch Opening
Claus – Mr. Smith, we’re confirming the invitations 
for the opening. Should I invite the mayor 
too? 
Mr. Smith – No no no…I must invite him myself—it’s my 
job as chairman. So, please, just prepare 
the invitation. 
Claus – No problem, sir. Uh, we need more details 
on our budget…
Mr. Smith – Well, you should spend as little as 
possible, but make a beautiful reception 
for our community…However, you must 
not spend more than a hundred thousand, 
OK?
Claus – Copy that, sir. I’ll be righton it…
:: COMMON MISTAKES
I N C O R R E CT
You should to make the balance.
C O R R E CT
You should make the balance.
Affirmative
Subject + Must + Verb (to)
Subject + Should + Verb (to)
Negative
Subject + Must Not (Mustn’t) (to) + 
Verb (different meaning)
Subject + Should Not (Shouldn’t) 
(to) + Verb
Interrogative
Must + Subject + Verb (to)
Should + Subject + Verb (to)
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
183
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
Story → Narrative → Moves from the past to the present and into the future
In order to make a narrative, it is necessary to use verb forms and time expressions that show the 
chronological sequence of the actions.
 
• Narrative About the Past 
Verb Forms 
Simple Past → Single complete action at a defined point in the past. 
Affirmative: Regular Verbs (–D, –ED, –IED) and Irregular Verbs (list at the end of the book) 
Negative and Interrogative: Auxiliary Verb Did 
Past Continuous → Action that was temporary and/or in progress during a period in the past. 
Affirmative: To Be (in the past) + Verb –ING 
Negative and Interrogative: Follow the structure of the Verb To Be in the past
Time Expressions
• Narrative About the Present
Verb Forms
Simple Present → Actions that represent facts or routine. 
Affirmative: Simple form for I, you, we, they and third person inflection (–S, –ES, or –IES) 
Negative and Interrogative: Auxiliaries Do (I, you, we, they) and Does (he, she, it)
NARRATIVE TIMELINE
Last year / Yesterday / Two days ago / Last (season) / Last month / Last week / In (year) / Back in (year)
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
184
L E S S O N 4
INTERMEDIATE 1
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
Wendy – Grandpa, how do you feel today?
John – I feel fine, honey. You know, when I look at you, I remember when you were a little girl. One 
 day, you were running around this room and you fell. When you stood up, you started laughing. 
Wendy – That sounds like me.
John – Yeah! Then I look at you now, and you’re a successful professional, a loving mother. I know we 
 did a good job and that you will be old and happy just like me and your grandma. 
Time Expressions
Time Expressions
Other expressions and connectors that are used to connect events in time and sequence them in a narrative.
• Narrative About the Future
Verb Form
Modal Verb Will → Modify verbs giving an idea of prediction based on the speaker’s perspective. 
Affirmative: Will + Verb (Bare Infinitive: Without To) 
Negative: Will not/Won’t + Verb (Bare Infinitive: Without To) 
Interrogative: Will + Subject + Verb (Bare Infinitive: Without To)
Today / Now / Right now / At this moment / Nowadays / Currently / This month / This week / 
This year / On (weekday) / In (month) 
Tomorrow / Tomorrow morning / Today / By the end of the week / In the beginning of the week / 
Next month / Next year / In ten years / In a few days
When / While / After that / Right after / Then
Talking About Life 
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
185
R E V I E W
HOW TO MAKE PREDICTIONS AND EXPRESS 
DIFFERENT DEGREES OF CERTAINTY
It’s Career Day in Nicole and Lee’s school and they had to go to 
school dressed as the professionals they want to be in the future.
Nicole says she will be a doctor because she loves to take 
care of people. She is not sure, but she can become either 
a pediatrician or a neonatal specialist. The only thing she is 
absolutely sure of is that she loves children. In the future, she 
will be a volunteer in Africa to help people who are really poor 
and need assistance to survive. 
Lee is positive he will have to study very hard to be an 
engineer. A few years from now, he predicts that he will win 
a math competition because he is really good at it. He will 
build things but he could also change his mind and study to 
become an astronaut. Lee believes that in twenty years, after 
he graduates, humans will live on other planets too and he will 
help build the houses there.
Informal Conversations Job Interviews Paper Presentations About the Future
TV News Editorials Debates About the Future of the World 
:: LANGUAGE IN ACTION
In order to make predictions, and to express different degrees of certainty, you can use:
• Modal Verb Will → For predictions based on your decision and personal opinion.
• Modal Verbs Can and Could → For possibilities.
• Time Expressions About the Future → To locate your activities in time.
• Adverbs That Indicate Certainty → Definitely, surely, absolutely, undoubtedly.
• Adverbs That Indicate Doubt → (Un)likely, probably, hardly, barely.
• Expressions to Indicate Certainty → I’m pretty sure… / I’m positive… / I totally think…
• Expressions to Indicate Doubt → I’m not really sure but... / I guess… / I might be wrong but…
Let’s see how these structures work in context?
Here are the elements we have in these predictions made by Nicole and Lee.
• Modal Verb Will: She will be a doctor... / She will be a volunteer in Africa... / He will have to study 
very hard... / He predicts that he will win a math competition... / He will build things... / Humans will 
live on other planets and he will help build the houses there.
• Modal Verb Can and Could: She can become either a pediatrician or a neonatal specialist... / He 
could also change his mind and study to become an astronaut.
• Time Expressions About the Future: In the future, A few years from now, in twenty years
• Adverbs and Expressions to Give Opinion: She is not sure but… / The only thing she is absolutely 
sure is… / Lee is positive… / Lee believes that…
Some situations in which you can talk about your predictions about the future are: 
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
186
L E S S O N 5
INTERMEDIATE 1
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
Connectors
CONNECTORS: ADDITION AND CONTRAST
• Addition (+)
Connectors of addition link complementary elements or ideas. Some connectors of addition are: 
And Besides that Also Moreover Furthermore
Sunny weather + High temperature 
The weather today is sunny and the temperature is really high.
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
are
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
187
Beautiful day + Ideal for a picnic 
It’s a beautiful day today. It's also it’s an ideal day 
for picnic. 
Rainy weather + Mild temperature
The weather today is rainy. Besides that, the 
temperature is mild. 
It’s raining + Need to study 
Let’s stay in, it’s raining. Moreover, I need to study for 
the test.
It’s too hot at the beach + Air conditioning at home
I don’t really like to go to the beach because it’s too 
hot. Furthermore, there’s air conditioning at home. 
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
188
L E S S O N 5
INTERMEDIATE 1
A weird date vs. Have a great time
It wasn't one of those weird dates; on the contrary, 
I had a great time!
It’s nice outdoors vs. Prefer staying in
Although it’s nice outdoors, I prefer staying in and 
reading a book. 
Go out vs. Clean up
I’d love to go out. On the other hand, I need to clean 
up the house. 
It’s sunny vs. It’s not hot
It’s a sunny day but it’s not hot. 
• Contrast (vs.) 
Connectors of contrast link contrary elements or ideas. The connectors of contrast are: 
But On the other hand On the contrary 
Although Even Though However
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
189
:: STAY ALERT
Connectors like although and even though can be used in the beginning of the first clause or between the 
two clauses.
Although Gillian is a very responsible worker, she arrives late too many times. 
Gillian arrives late too many times, although she’s a very responsible worker. 
Even though Gillian is a very responsible worker, she arrives late too many times. 
Gillian arrives late too many times even though she is a very responsible worker.
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
Watching TV
Elliot – Vera, do you know this show Superfuzz? 
Vera – Yeah! It’s all right but a little tiring after 
 some time. 
Elliot – I think I agree with you. I guess it’s the 
 presenter. Besides that, it's too repetitive.
Love loud music vs. Don’t like to bother people
Even though I love loud music, I don’t like to bother 
people. 
I’m not athletic vs. Run in the park
I’m not athletic. However, I run in the park sometimes.
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
190
L E S S O N 5
INTERMEDIATE 1
• Asking for Clarification 
You use expressions to ask for clarification when you are listening to someone’s opinion and you don’t 
understand.
Do you get what I'm saying?
Do you know what I mean? 
Did I make myself clear? 
You know? 
Right?
Yeah?
Mark – I think this dress doesn’t suit you. 
Leah – What do you mean?
What do you mean?
I don’t get it...
I beg your pardon?
Come again... 
How come?
• Checking Understanding 
You use expressions to check understanding to make sure the listener is paying attention to you and 
understands what you’re saying. 
You know I like horror movies, right? 
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
Hosting Dinner 
Jack – So, what do you guys think about the meal?
Hugh – I think it’s great but I’d use more salt. 
Jack – What do you mean? 
Hugh – People say it’s impolite to add salt, right? But 
 I’d like more salt. 
Jack – Oh, I see...you can add more salt! I won’t 
 think you’re impolite, you know?
Giving Opinion in a Conversation → Checking Understanding → “Do you know what I’m saying?”
 → Asking for Clarification → “What do you mean?”
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
GIVING OPINION: ASKING FOR CLARIFICATION 
AND CHECKING UNDERSTANDING
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
191
• Asking for Opinion
• Agreeing 
• Checking Understanding
• Disagreeing 
• Asking for Clarification
To Agree = To have the same opinion as someone else 
When you want to know if the listener is following your statements you check understanding.
To Disagree = To have a different or completely opposite opinion
When you don’t understand what the other person says you ask for clarification. 
What do you think about...? / What is your opinion about...? / What is your take on…? / 
Do you think that…?
I agree with you. / I agree that... / I have the same opinion. / I couldn’t agree more. / 
That’s exactly what I think.
Got it? / Does that make sense? / Do you have any questions? / Do you understand that? / 
Are you following me?
I don't agree... / I disagree... / I have a different opinion. / I beg to differ. / I don't think so.
What do you mean by...? / Come again? / I beg your pardon? / Sorry, I don’t get it. / 
Can you say that again? / I am not sure I understand. / What? / Say that again.
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
When it comes to exchanging opinions, there are different functions, each with expressions you can 
use. Let’s review some of them.
GIVING OPINION: REVIEW
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
192
L E S S O N 5
INTERMEDIATE 1
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
• Being Subtle
• Being Emphatic 
Interview 1
Reporter – What is your opinion about the situation of stray dogs? (asking for opinion)
Annie – I really think the government should take responsibility and collect those dogs. (Being emphatic) 
Reporter – Don’t you think that the people should also take action? (asking for opinion)
Annie – What do you mean? (asking for clarification)
Reporter – Well, some animals run away but there are also cases of abandonment. 
Annie – Yeah, but I disagree that it’s only the people. There is a lot the government can do to teach 
people about respecting life as a whole, you know. (disagreeing)
Reporter – Thank you for your opinion.
It is not what is said but how it is said. In certain situations, you don’t want to say things directly and risk 
sounding rude. 
Sometimes it’s necessary to make a point, but remember that being emphatic is not being rude. 
I kind of think that... / I tend to believe that... / I guess that maybe... / I would say that... / 
I might be wrong but I think… / I probably agree with… 
I do believe that... / I strongly believe that... / I definitely believethat... / I really don't think 
that... / I (certainly/definitely/deeply) agree with...
Interview 2
Reporter – Do you think it is important to adopt stray dogs? (asking for opinion)
Jake – Not really. I think people do what they feel like doing. 
Reporter – But there are many abandoned dogs on the streets. 
Jake – I agree and it’s horrible when people abandon their pets. (agreeing) However, when it comes to 
 how to get a pet, I tend to believe that people can opt to buy or adopt and it’s nobody’s place to 
 judge. (being subtle)
Reporter – Thank you for your opinion.
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
193
• May
Strong Possibility 
Ian may travel with his family next month. (It’s very likely he will do it.)
I can ask my boss, but I may not be able to leave early tomorrow. (It is very likely that I won't leave early.)
Permission
May I have a word with you? (Do you allow me to have a word with you?)
You may enter. (You have my permission to enter.)
• Might
Remote Possibility 
Anthony is busy today, but he might show up at the party. (There is a slight chance Anthony will show up.)
Elaine’s baby might not be a girl. (There is a slight chance the baby will be a boy.)
*Might isn’t normally used in direct questions, but you can make indirect questions with it. 
Do you think you might have a chance at the race? 
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
At the CEO’s Office
Mario – Excuse me, sir. May I come in?
Mr. York – Sure, Mario. How may I help you?
Mario – We need to organize a gathering 
 for the holidays. 
Mr. York – About that...our finances aren’t good. 
 We might have to cancel the celebrations. 
Mario – But is there still a chance?
Mr. York – Give me a few weeks and I’ll see what 
 we can do. 
Mario – Great. Thank you, sir. 
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
Modal Verbs → Add meaning to the main verb according to the speaker’s interpretation of facts.
 → May have different ideas depending on the context and the speaker’s goal. 
 → Used with verbs, no preposition between them. 
MODAL VERBS: MAY AND MIGHT
May Might 
Po
ss
ib
ili
ty
 
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
194
L E S S O N 5
INTERMEDIATE 1
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
Relative Pronouns → Modify nouns or some pronouns → Used to identify people and things or to give extra 
information about them.
Note: That is also an alternative for which. Check the chapter about the relative pronoun which to learn its use.
RELATIVE PRONOUNS: WHO AND THAT
:: COMMON MISTAKES
I N C O R R E CT
May I to talk to you?
We might don’t go to the party.
C O R R E CT
May I talk to you?
We might not go to the party.
The postman, who came this morning, delivered an 
important message. 
Extra information → Not necessary to understand 
who the postman is. 
Note: When used to add information, the relative 
clause introduced by Who comes in between 
commas (,).
Johnny is the postman who came this morning.
Essential information to identify the postman.
• Relative Pronoun Who
• Who replaces a repeated reference of people, introducing a relative clause.
• It may give extra information or essential information about the subject. 
• Who is the subject of the relative clause. 
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
195
L E S S O N 6
Connectors → Conjunctions → Conclusion
 → You can use prepositions, linking words, and expressions.
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
Juliet usually makes friends with people that are 
trustworthy and show her a good time.
 Essential information to identify the subject. 
Juliet is a woman that values her right to be 
independent. 
 Essential information to identify Juliet. 
• Relative Pronoun That
• That replaces who in more informal contexts.
• That may be used to identify people.
• Relative clauses introduced by that don’t come in between commas (,).
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
Talking About Love Interests
Gail – I know you are interested in someone, 
 Sarah. Come on, tell me. 
Sarah – It’s Phil…from the office. 
Gail – Phil who gave you a ride home the other day?
Sarah – Exactly. He is also the person that comes by 
 my desk to say good morning every day. 
Gail – Oh my god! You’re so going to get together. 
Sarah – Well, I don’t know. He used to have a 
 girlfriend who works in the office. It’s weird. 
Gail – Just go for it, be happy, girl.
CONNECTORS: CONCLUSION
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
196
L E S S O N 6
INTERMEDIATE 1
Connectors of conclusion link the origin to the conclusion 
itself. They may also have a relationship of cause and 
consequence. 
So Because of that As a conclusion Summing up To make a long story short Therefore 
As a result To conclude As we have seen As we all know In short
Hurt foot → Can’t play football
Jake’s foot is hurt, so he can’t play football. 
Short on cash → Won’t go out tonight 
Noel is short on cash, because of that he won’t 
go out tonight.
Worked all day, exhausted and hungry → Stay at home 
I worked all day, I’m exhausted and hungry. Summing 
up, I’m staying at home. 
• Conclusion 
Operations were weak → Cut expenses 
Our operations were weak this month. As a 
conclusion, we need to cut expenses. 
*Connectors such as To make a long story short, As we have seen, As we all know, and In short, tend to 
come at the end of texts to conclude the idea based on all that was seen before. 
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
197
*Some modal verbs contain certain features in the negative form.
• Won’t is the short form of will not.
• Cannot is the long form of can in the negative.
• Might Not is the most frequently used form of might in the negative. 
• Mustn’t is not the opposite of must.
Modal Verbs → Auxiliary Verbs used to express modality (such as ability, obligation, necessity, and possibility) 
according to the speaker’s perception. Theydon’t add time or factual elements to verbs. 
Affirmative
Subject + Modal Verb + Verb (to)
Negative
Subject + Modal Verb + Not* + 
(to) + Verb
Interrogative
Modal + Subject + Verb (to)
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
Dilemma
Erika – Mom, I don’t know what to do. I need to lose 
 weight but I can’t resist the food at weddings! 
Anna – Erika, you have your own wedding in two 
 months and a dress to fit in. In short, you 
 have no option. 
Erika – I know. But I have three other weddings to 
 go to until then. Should I skip them?
Anna – No, Erika. You have your goals, so stick to 
 them. 
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
MODAL VERBS (REVIEW)
:: COMMON MISTAKES
I N C O R R E CT
So I don’t eat chocolate, I don’t like it.
C O R R E CT
I don’t like chocolate, so I don’t eat it.
• Structure
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
198
L E S S O N 6
INTERMEDIATE 1
Will Can Could May Might Must Should
Ability in the 
Present
X
Ability in the 
Past
X
Possibility X Remote X Remote
Request X X X
Permission X X
Advice X
Obligation / 
Necessity
X
Prediction X
:: STAY ALERT
You can’t do it, it’s wrong.→ I think it’s wrong. 
You mustn’t do it, it’s prohibited. → You know it’s wrong. 
May I come in? → Formal use. It’s possible to be used in informal settings to show respect. 
Can I come in? → Informal or Neutral use. You could be opening the door as you ask this question.
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
Asking for Favors
June – Mike, can you do me a favor? 
Mike – Well, I could if I didn’t have to go out now…Can’t you 
 ask Mia instead, June?
June – Yeah, OK, all right…I’m sorry…I should organize myself 
 better because I’m simply lost in all my duties!
Mike – Could I give you a piece of advice? If you don’t mind...
June – Yeah, sure… 
Mike – You should hire a secretary or you will get really 
 stressed out…
June – Yeah, I know…It might take a while until I can do it, 
 though… 
Mike – Look, I must go now or I’ll be in trouble. Catch you 
 later, June! 
June – Catch you later, Mike! Thanks for the advice.
• Modal Verbs
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
199
REASONING: WHY
• Questions 
Do you think that it’s a good idea to go on a road trip this summer? 
Don't you think (that) summer is the best season?
Why do you think (that) it’s better to travel at night?
• Introducing Sentences—Reasoning
Why don’t you like to travel in the holiday season?
Because the roads are too busy.
Do you think it is a good idea to drive late at night?
I’d say that it is better in the morning, but we’ll waste time if we don’t leave on Friday night.
Why do you buy so much food?
The reason is that I hate going to the supermarket during the week.
OK, but why me? 
The point is that if I go shopping for food, we’ll only eat cookies and chocolate. 
Reasoning
Why...?
Answer the 
question “Why?” or 
other questions that 
seek justification.
Check the Chapter "Question Word: Why” to review in detail. 
Reasons, arguments, and 
evidence that support 
argumentation.
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
Negotiating an Invitation List
Jake – Darling, I was checking the guest list...why 
 don’t we invite Mr. Sanders? 
Laura – Because we can only invite ninety people 
 and he is just your boss, not a friend.
Jake – Don’t you think he’ll enjoy being invited?
Laura – Baby, the point is that we would need to cut 
 two of our friends or family from the list to 
 invite him. 
Jake – Let me help you... 
Laura – Why do you want to invite him?
Jake – Because I want to get my promotion and he 
 is my boss!
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
200
L E S S O N 6
INTERMEDIATE 1
Used To Be Used To
Past habit / State or situation no longer true Familiar Things or Actions
• Used To 
Describes a past habit: something you regularly did in the past but you don't do anymore. It can also 
refer to a state or situation that is no longer true.
• Structure
vs. 
BE USED TO VS. USED TO 
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
Negative → Subject + Didn’t Use To + Verb + Complement 
 Tara didn’t use to enjoy going to the movies. 
 (Nowadays, she enjoys going to the movies.) 
→ → → →
→ → → →
Affirmative → Subject + Used To + Verb + Complement 
 Joan used to play at the beach when she was a kid. 
 (Nowadays, as an adult, she doesn’t play anymore.)
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
201
Affirmative → Subject + Be Used To + Complement 
 Pete is used to high temperatures.
→ → →
Interrogative → To Be + Subject + Used To + Complement 
 Are you used to cold showers?
→ → → →
Negative → Subject + Be (Negative) Used To + Complement 
 Julia isn’t used to diet food. 
→ → →
Structure
Be Used To + Things in General → To be accustomed to something.
• Be Used to 
The verb to be can be inflected in any verb form or combined with modals according to the meaning the 
speaker wants to convey (Was/Were Used To, Am/Is/Are Used To, Can Be Used To…). It refers to an action or 
something that is familiar to you because of previous experience. 
Interrogative → Did + Subject + Use To + Verb + Complement 
 Did you use to take theater lessons at school?
 (In the past, was it a habit of yours to take theater lessons at school?)
→ → → → →
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
202
L E S S O N 6
INTERMEDIATE 1
Be Used To + Actions → To be accustomed to doing something.
(He doesn’t usually do it so he probably gets very tired.)
(Are you accustomed to traveling on your own?)
Affirmative → Subject + Be Used To + Verb (–ING form) + Complement 
 Jack is used to waking up early.
→ → → →
Negative → Subject + To Be (Negative) Used To + Verb (–ING form) + Complement 
 Cody isn’t used to doing exercises.
→ → → →
Interrogative → To Be + Subject + Used To + Verb (–ING form) + Complement 
 Are you used to traveling solo?
→ → → → →
(He is accostumed to waking up early probably because he doesit every day.)
I N C O R R E CT
I’m used to go out on the weekend.
I used like vegetables as a kid.
C O R R E CT
I’m used to going out on the weekend.
I used to like vegetables as a kid.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
New Mom
Lisa – Hey, Stacy! Look at you with twins! 
Stacy – I know, right? I used to sleep like a baby but now I know that babies don’t sleep at night. 
Lisa – You’re funny! Are they your first?
Stacy – Yes, yes, probably the only ones. 
Lisa – It is tough being a new mom. How about Jackson? Is he used to the crying and changing diapers yet? 
Stacy – He’s great. I guess he is more used to doing the whole baby thing than I am. 
Lisa – You know, Mike and I used to say we would wait some time before having babies, but then Katie arrived. 
Stacy – And now you can’t imagine your life without her, right? 
Lisa – Exactly! We love being parents. O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
204
INTERMEDIATE 2
L E S S O N 1
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
Meeting Friends
Britney – Hey, Megan! I'm going to meet the girls 
 later in the afternoon for some coffee. 
 Would you like to join us?
Megan – I'd love to, but I can't. I'm going to work 
 overtime today. 
Britney – That's a shame. Don't worry. I'm going to 
 talk to the girls and we can meet again 
 next week.
Megan – That would be great!
Structure
BE GOING TO
Be Going To
Future Plans
Predictions Based on Evidence
Affirmative: Subject + To Be + Going To + Complement 
Lisa is going to get married next month.
Negative: Subject + To Be + Not + Going To + Complement 
Unfortunately, I'm not going to be here on the wedding day.
Interrogative: To Be + Subject + Going To + Complement 
Are you going to get her a wedding gift?
Questions Words and Be Going To
Structure: Question Word + To Be + Subject + Going To + Complement
Where is Lisa going to get married?
What are you going to get her as a gift?
How are you going to tell her you can't go?
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
205
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
Comparative Forms → Superiority → Long Adjectives / Short Adjectives / Irregular Forms 
 → Equality 
 → Inferiority
This chapter focuses on the comparative forms used to express superiority.
• Long Adjectives 
In order to form comparatives with long adjectives, you need to follow this structure: 
• Short Adjectives 
In order to form comparatives with short adjectives, you need to follow this structure:
Adjectives ending in consonant + –Y → Drop the Y
and add –IER → Happy – Happier
Other short adjectives → Add –ER → Tall – Taller → Fat– Fatter* 
*Pay attention to the CVC rule: double the last consonant.
I bought a couch that is more comfortable than the old one. 
Kelly is happier than she used to be. 
:: STAY ALERT
I am going to talk to him. → In spoken language = emphasis
 In written language = formality
I'm going to talk to him. → In spoken and written language = neutral
I'm gonna talk to him. → In spoken language = informal
 In written language = very informal
:: COMMON MISTAKES
I N C O R R E CT
The girls going to meet later.
C O R R E CT
The girls are going to meet later.
COMPARATIVE FORMS: SUPERIORITY
More + Adjective + Than
Adjective (–ER or –IER) + Than
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
206
L E S S O N 1
INTERMEDIATE 2
• Formal or Informal 
Formality relies on: 
• The social code of the place. (Is it formal? Is it informal? 
 Is it casual?)
• The difference between the participants in the 
 interaction. (Do you know them? Are you close? Are you 
 intimate? Are you higher or lower in hierarchy? Are you 
 much younger?) 
• Generally, the bigger the gap between participants in the 
 interaction, the higher the level of formality. Older people tend 
 to be more formal.
• Irregular Comparatives 
A few words have irregular comparative forms: 
Good → Better 
Bad → Worse 
Far → Further (metaphorical distance) / Farther (physical distance)
GIVING OPINION
Giving Opinion → Formal or Informal → Where are you? → Whom are you talking to? 
 → Subtle or Emphatic → Where are you? → Whom are you talking to? → Do you need to convince people?
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
:: COMMON MISTAKES
I N C O R R E CT
Henry is more short than Michael.
This can’t get more bad.
C O R R E CT
Henry is shorter than Michael.
This can’t get worse.
Lenny is taller than Adam.
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
Shopping for Food
Lyanne – Can you believe these prices, Julia?
Julia – I know. Everything is more expensive than ever before. 
Lyanne – Unbelievable. This jam is better than that one, but that one 
is cheaper. What should I do?
Julia – That depends. If I were you, I’d get what’s more essential, 
and then take the rest. 
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
207
MODAL VERBS: REVIEW
Modal Verbs → Modify verbs according to the speaker’s perspective
 → Are followed by a bare infinitive verb (without to)
 
Take a look at some phrases you can use to introduce your opinion formally and informally:
*Adverbs are useful resources when emphasizing opinion. Some of the most frequently used are: 
Completely / Entirely – This is completely/entirely wrong.
Brutally – I’ll be brutally honest with you: your text sucks. 
Just – This juice is just wonderful. 
Plain – I can’t read this piece of news. It’s plain stupid. 
Seriously – Seriously, I love it when you disagree with me. 
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
Co-workers Chatting at Coffee Break (Informal)
Alex – Hey, Phil: What do you think of the new career package 
they announced? 
Phil – I reckon it’s OK. It’s not wonderful.
Alex – It’s definitely better than before. (emphasing opinion)
Phil – Oh yeah. I agree. 
Receiving Feedback from Your Supervisor (Formal)
Mr. Smith – Mr. Lorne, basedon your reports, I would say 
that there is room for improvement. 
Mr. Lorne – I understand, Mr. Smith. 
Mr. Smith – It could possibly be a case of demotivation. 
Your results are not as good as before. 
Mr. Lorne – It may be true that I’m a little more stressed out. 
Mr. Smith – That would certainly be a problem. How about 
going on vacation to get some rest?
Mr. Lorne – That would be wonderful, sir. 
Being Subtle Being Emphatic 
I kind of think that... I am convinced that...
It may be true that... I’m positive that...
It’s just that... I must say that... 
It could possibly... *Definitely...
Check the table for the meaning of each modal verb.
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
208
L E S S O N 1
INTERMEDIATE 2
Let’s focus on may and might. What is the difference between them?
• May 
When used in the affirmative form, it means possibility. 
I heard Jack and I may work together but we don’t really get along. (It is very likely they will work 
together.)
In its negative form, it is unlikely that something will happen. 
There’s a lot of traffic, we may not get there on time. (It is very likely they won’t arrive on time.)
In the interrogative form, it is used to request permission. It can be used in contexts in which the speaker 
highly respects the people he or she is talking to. 
May I have a word with you? (Do I have your permission to have a word with you?)
May is commonly used in indirect questions to indicate possibility.
Do you think I may have a chance in this audition? (Do you think it is possible that I have a chance?)
• Might
In its affirmative form, it means remote possibility.
We might need more people in the department. (There is a slight chance we need more people.)
In its negative form, it is very unlikely that something will happen.
The sales department might not be able to do well this month. (There is a chance they won’t do well.)
Might is more common in indirect questions. It also means a remote possibility.
Do you think John might find out about our secret? (Is there any chance John will find out?)
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
Planning to Move out
Ben – Mom, there is something I must tell you, 
but don’t be mad at me. 
Wanda – Why? What did you do?
Ben – Nothing, mom. It’s not what I did but what 
I will do. I’ll move out. 
Wanda – Oh, that? About time! You should try to find 
a roommate to share the bills. 
Ben – No, I’m fine by myself. I was wondering if 
you could help me visit some places. 
Modal
Can
Could
Will
Must 
Mustn’t 
Should
May
Might 
Possible meanings depending on the context and on the speaker’s decision
Present Ability / Informal Request / Possibility 
Past Ability / Polite Request / Possibility 
Decision made at the moment of speaking / Prediction based on opinion / Inevitability 
Obligation 
Prohibition 
Advice and Recommendation 
Possibility / Formal Request 
Remote Possibility 
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
209
L E S S O N 2
• Comparatives of Equality
• Comparatives of Inferiority
As + Adjective + As
Less + Adjective + Than
:: COMMON MISTAKES
I N C O R R E CT
Might we meet tomorrow? 
Buddy, may I talk to you? 
C O R R E CT
Do you think we might meet tomorrow?
Buddy, can I talk to you?
COMPARATIVE FORMS: EQUALITY AND INFERIORITY
Comparative Forms → Superiority 
 → Equality 
 → Inferiority 
In order to form comparatives of equality, you need to follow this structure: 
In order to form comparatives of inferiority, you need to follow this structure: 
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
Laura is as fun as Jessica. Kimberly is as responsible as Stacy. 
Wanda – Sure, honey. It might take some time until we find something perfect, but that will be fun. 
Ben – I guess! Can you come check a place with me now? 
Wanda – Right now? Hmm…that could be a problem…your dad is taking me to lunch. 
Ben – Dad can wait. Besides, we may be back before he arrives. 
Wanda – All right. Let me give him a call. 
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
210
L E S S O N 2
INTERMEDIATE 2
Tony is less talkative when his mother is around.
:: STAY ALERT
Although the comparative of inferiority form exists, the comparatives of superiority or equality (in the negative 
form) are more frequently used. 
Mike is less friendly than Lawrence.
Lawrence is friendlier than Mike. or Mike is not as friendly as Lawrence. 
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
Choosing a Restaurant
Hank – Where are we having dinner tonight?
Sarah – I was thinking of going to Marlo’s. 
Hank – Don’t you think that Sicily Kitchen is better? Marlo’s 
 is not as comfortable as Sicily Kitchen. 
Sarah – But it’s less expensive. 
Hank – The food in Sicily Kitchen is as good as in Marlo’s, 
 we could use some comfort, no?
Sarah – Are you paying? If you are, we can go to Sicily 
 Kitchen, no problem. 
:: COMMON MISTAKES
I N C O R R E CT
Tina is as taller as Kate.
Chris is as smart than Martin.
C O R R E CT
Tina is as tall as Kate.
Chris is as smart as Martin.
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
Connectors → Prepositions
 → Linking words and expressions
 → Conjunctions 
Take a look at the table with some conjunctions, linking words and expressions that join sentences or terms inferring 
the ideas of addition, contrast, and conclusion.
Addition, Contrast, and Conclusion
CONNECTORS: ADDITION, CONTRAST, AND CONCLUSION
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
211
Although they all share the idea they convey when linking phrases or elements of sentences, 
there is generally a difference in position. 
Position of Connectors in Sentences 
• And, and also, but, and so, won’t appear in the beginning of sentences. They may come after a 
period but connecting two sentences. 
Savannah works all day and studies at night.
Johnny is athletic but he hates team sports. 
Tommy is an accountant, so he is the best person to help you with a new company.
• However and therefore will usually come between the sentences they link, after a period or not. 
Henry is very careful with his money. However, he likes to splash out sometimes. 
Peter won the lottery. Therefore, he is now a rich man.
• Although, even though, in spite of or despite will introduce the sentences but they can appear 
in the middle when clauses are inverted.
Even though Julienne is on a diet, she agreed to have dinner with us. 
Julienneagreed to have dinner with us, even though she’s on a diet.
In spite of being on a diet, Julienne agreed to have dinner with us. 
Julienne agreed to have dinner with us, in spite of being on a diet.
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
Business Presentation 
Mr. Elliot – As you can see in the graph, there has 
 been a decrease in the profit. The reason 
 for that can be the country’s situation or 
 a problem in our operations. However, 
 we’ll focus on our recovery based on 
 internal operations. Besides that, we’re 
 hiring a financial consultant to help us out. 
 Thank you.
Addition
And 
Besides that
And also 
Moreover 
Furthermore
Contrast
But 
On the other hand 
On the contrary 
Conclusion
So 
Because of that 
As a conclusion
Summing up 
To make a long 
story short 
Therefore 
As a result 
To conclude 
As we have seen 
As we all know 
In short
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
212
L E S S O N 2
INTERMEDIATE 2
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
There are different words you can use to either express certainty or doubt while giving opinion. 
For example:
• Adverbs
• Adjectives
• Modal Verbs
• Adverbs
• Adjectives
Aaron – Perhaps we should look for some 
 alternatives.
Tim – I agree. We should definitely look 
for alternatives.
GIVING OPINION: EXPRESSING CERTAINTY AND DOUBT
Expressing Certainty Expressing Doubt
 
Definitely Probably
Certainly Maybe 
Surely/For sure Perhaps
Expressing Certainty Expressing Doubt
 
Sure Unsure
Confident Doubtful
Positive Uncertain
Ms. Stone is probably the 
best person for this position.
I agree with you. But I doubt she will 
be willing to move to another city.
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
213
• Modal Verbs
Barney – I might be wrong, but I think I will 
have to work on Saturday.
Mindy – Then I guess we may have to 
change our plans for the weekend.
Jordan – Are you sure this is the right way?
Meredith – Yes, don’t worry. I’m positive.
Expressing Certainty Expressing Doubt
 
I must… I might…
I will… I may…
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
Taking Some Days Off
Lorena – I may take a couple of days off next week. 
Derek – I think you should definitely do that. 
 You are stressed.
Lorena – I surely am. What I’m unsure of is whether 
 I’ll be able to. I need to finish these reports 
 first.
Derek – Don’t worry. I will help you finish them this 
 week. And if we don’t, I’m positive I can 
 take care of it next week.
Lorena – Thank you, Derek. You are the best.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
I N C O R R E CT
I’m going to the party surely.
I will maybe travel next month
C O R R E CT
I’m surely going to the party. 
I’m going to the party for sure.
I may travel next month. 
Perhaps I’ll travel next month.
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
214
L E S S O N 2
INTERMEDIATE 2
WILL VS. BE GOING TO 
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
Take a look at the following contexts and notice how both structures are used.
Billy will host a dinner party and, as he walks home, he passes by a bakery.
Tanya wants to go on vacation and she is talking to her boss about it.
EXPRESSING FUTURE 
? WILL
BE GOING TO ?
?
Will vs. Be Going To 
Prediction Based on Opinion Prediction Based on Evidence 
Inevitability Plans
Billy – Oh, that bread smells good. I’ll get some to 
 take home.
(The decision to buy was made at the moment Billy 
smelled the bread as he passed by the bakery.)
Tanya – So, Leah, I was thinking...can I go on 
 vacation in November? 
Leah – I guess so. 
Tanya – Wonderful. My husband is also on vacation 
 in November. 
Leah – Are you going to travel together?
Tanya – Definitely! We have the money, we just 
 needed the time. We’re going to spend 
 a few days in Thailand. (Tanya is planning 
 to go to Thailand.)
Leah – Oh, you’ll love it there!
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
215
Mary is going to travel and she’s leaving her keys with her mom. 
• Structure
Hence, Thus, Consequently → Used in the between two 
sentences or at the beginning of 
a sentence.
Mary – Mom, here are the keys. You need to water 
 the plants and feed Toby three times a day. 
Mom – Don’t worry, Mary. I won’t forget to do that. 
 (It’s a promise.)
Mary – Please, mom. Oh, and you need to walk him 
 a bit or he will be sad. (It’s inevitable.)
Mom – OK, honey. I’ll do everything. Your plants and 
 Toby are going to be fine when you 
 come back. (It’s a promise, and because of 
 everything she’ll do, Toby and the plants 
 are going to be fine.)
Mary – Great! I’ll be back in two weeks. 
 (It’s a prediction.)
:: STAY ALERT
In spoken English, there is little difference between using will or be going to. 
Remember that, in spoken English, it is common to use the short form of will (’ll) or the short form of the verb 
to be with going to.
Julia – Let’s have dinner together this Saturday.
Michael – I can’t. I’ll probably travel this Saturday. / I’m going to travel this Saturday.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
I N C O R R E CT
Larry will to help you. 
C O R R E CT
Larry will help you.
L E S S O N 3
CONNECTORS: CAUSE AND EFFECT
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
216
L E S S O N 2
INTERMEDIATE 2
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
Broken Car
Bob – Honey, I think it's time to get a new car. 
Kate – Get a new car? But we want to spend a month traveling in Europe, 
that's why we've been saving money for six months.
Bob – I know, baby. But the thing is I need the car to work. It's the third time 
it breaks this month. As a consequence, we've been wasting money 
repairing it all the time.
Kate – I see.
We need to save money to open our business. Thus / 
Hence / Consequently it is going to be impossible to travel on 
the holidays.
We worked hard, thus / hence / consequently we succeeded.
Donald is definitely not tellingme the truth.
As a consequence, I cannot trust him.
You didn't do your homework, and as a 
consequence of that, you are grounded.
I'll have to work overtime this week, that's why / 
because of that / as a result I can't meet you tonight.
As a consequence (of something) → Used in between two sentences/clauses or at the beginning 
of a sentence. Usually has a negative connotation.
That's why, Because of that, As a result → Used in between two sentences/clauses or at the 
beginning of a sentence.
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
217
Narratives → Verb Forms 
 → Time Expressions 
 → Connectors 
:: COMMON MISTAKES
I N C O R R E CT
I need to go because of that I have to work.
I need to save money. Because I'm not going to 
travel with you.
C O R R E CT
I need to go because I have to work.
I need to save money. That's why / Because of 
that I'm not going to travel with you.
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
:: STAY ALERT
Thus, hence → Considered more formal
As a consequence → Used mostly for negative consequences
Past
Simple Past 
Past Continuous
Present
Simple Present 
Present Continuous 
Future
Will
Be Going to 
NARRATIVE TIMELINE
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
218
L E S S O N 3
INTERMEDIATE 2
• Verbs in a Narrative About the Past 
Simple Past → Single complete action at a defined point in the past. 
 Affirmative: Regular verbs (–D, –ED, –IED) and irregular verbs (list at the end of the book)
 Negative and Interrogative: Auxiliary verb did
Past Continuous → Action that was temporary and/or in progress during a period in the past. 
 Affirmative: To Be (in the Past) + Verb in –ING
 Negative and Interrogative: The same structure of the verb to be in the past
• Verbs in a Narrative About the Present
Simple Present → Actions that represent facts or routine. 
Affirmative: Simple form for I, You, We, They and third person inflection (–S, –ES or –IES) 
Negative and Interrogative: Auxiliaries Do (I, You, We, They) and Does (He, She, It)
Present Continuous → Action in progress during a period in the present and into the future. 
Affirmative: To Be (In the Present) + Verb in –ING 
Negative and Interrogative: The same structure of the verb to be in the present
• Narrative About the Future
Modal verb Will → Modify verbs giving an idea of future prediction based on the speaker’s perspective. 
Affirmative: Will + Verb (Bare Infinitive: Without To) 
Negative: Will not/Won’t + Verb (Bare Infinitive: Without To) 
Interrogative: Will + Subject + Verb (Bare Infinitive: Without To)
Be Going To → Indicates a future plan or a prediction based on physical evidence. 
Affirmative: To Be (Present) + Going To + Verb (Bare Infinitive: Without To) 
Negative: To Be (Present/Negative) + Going To + Verb (Bare Infinitive: Without To) 
Interrogative: To Be (Present) + Subject + Going To + Verb (Bare Infinitive: Without To)
• Connectors of Time
For unexpected actions → Suddenly / Out of the blue / Unexpectedly
I was watching TV, completely distracted, and Jack suddenly opened the door. 
Cindy dreams of waking up one day, check the lottery ticket and get rich out of the blue. 
For actions that happen at the same time → Meanwhile / At the same time 
Mia will cook dinner. Meanwhile, John prepares some drinks and sets the table. 
For final actions or results → At the end vs. In the end
At the end: Static. Indicates the end of something.
at the end of the week, at the end of the story
In the end: It means “Finally”.
Mike was stuck in traffic, in the end, he was about five hours late.
Past
Yesterday 
Two days ago
Last week/month/year
Last summer/winter 
Present
Today 
On Mondays/Tuesdays
In spring/autumn
Always / Every day / Sometimes
Future
Tomorrow
Next week/month/year
In a few days
Shortly / Soon / In the future
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
219
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
Career Advice 
Susan – Dad, can you give me some advice? I just don’t know what I'll major in. 
Paul – Oh, darling, this is a difficult decision. I remember how hard it was for me. 
Susan – Yes? How so? 
Paul – Well, I was only eighteen when I got to college and I knew I wanted to be a football player. 
Susan – But for that, you needed to choose...
Paul – Exactly. So, I chose Business because it would be more useful for me, but then it became my main 
 job when my knee got hurt. After that injury, I had to quit football. 
Susan – Well, I’m not involved in sports but I’m going to be successful in something. I’ll choose arts. 
Paul – Arts? Well, it’s your life in the end. If you think this is it, then that’s what it is. 
Susan – Great! Thanks, dad. 
Pronouns → Always make reference to someone or something that was mentioned before in the sentence or 
in context.
Take a look at the following table to review some types of pronouns.
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
PRONOUNS: REVIEW AND AMBIGUITY
Singular
First person
Second person
Third person
Plural
First person
Second person
Third person
Use
Subject Pronouns
I
You
He / She / It
We 
You
They 
Function as subjects 
Come before verbs
Object Pronouns
Me
You
Him / Her / It
Us
You
Them
Function as objects 
Come after verbs and/or 
prepositions
Reflexive Pronouns
Myself
Yourself
Himself / Herself / Itself
Ourselves
Yourselves
Themselves 
Function as the object 
when both the subject 
and the object are the 
same person
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
220
L E S S O N 3
INTERMEDIATE 2
Jake – Hi, Clara! I was meaning to talk to you! 
Clara – Hi, Jake! What do you want from me? 
Jake – Actually, Tom said you were struggling with your new computer. 
Clara – Oh yeah, I told him it was no big deal. I managed to fix it by myself. 
Jake – Wonderful! If you need anything, let me know, OK? 
• Pronoun Ambiguity 
When using a pronoun, it is important to notice the term it refers to. 
Sometimes, the pronoun reference can be confusing. 
You can solve this ambiguity by reorganizing this sentence. 
Sarah doesn’t feel well, so Mia is looking for her. 
You solve this ambiguity by adding some words and replacing others. 
Adam is worried about Professor Storm because the professor claims to be in trouble. 
or
Adam is worried because the Professor said that Adam is in trouble. 
Superlative Forms → Superiority → Long Adjectives / Short Adjectives / Irregular Forms 
 → Inferiority
The superlative forms refer toextremes. It is one unique thing with an incomparable feature.
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
SUPERLATIVE FORMS
Mia is looking for Sarah because she doesn’t feel well. 
Ambiguity → Who doesn’t feel well: Mia or Sarah? 
Adam is worried because Professor Storm said he’s in trouble. 
Ambiguity → Who is in trouble: Adam or Professor Storm? 
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
A Misunderstanding 
Nat – Nate, are you going to Casey’s party?
Nate – I can’t, I’ve got band practice. 
Nat – Really? I heard Tommy saying you said you’d go. 
Nate – What was the exact sentence you heard? 
Nat – “Nate and Ted were talking and he said he’d go.” 
Nate – Exactly. Ted is going, not me. 
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
221
Superiority 
• Long Adjectives 
In order to form superlatives with long adjectives, you need to follow this structure: 
• Short Adjectives 
In order to form superlatives with short adjectives, you need to follow this structure:
• Irregular Superlatives
Some words have irregular superlative forms:
Good → The best 
Bad → The worst 
Far → The furthest (metaphorical distance) / The farthest (physical distance)
Note: The superlative form also follows the C.V.C. rule. 
Words ending in Consonant + Vowel + Consonant → Double the last consonant + –EST
Hot → The hottest Big → The biggest Sad → The saddest
Firing someone is the most 
uncomfortable thing one can do. 
Original adjective ending in Consonant + –Y → Drop the –Y and add –IEST → Pretty – The prettiest
Other short adjectives → Add –EST → Smart – The smartest
The Most + Adjective 
The + Adjective (–EST or –IEST) 
Stella is the shortest player on the soccer team. Tommy is the funniest friend I have. 
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
222
L E S S O N 3
INTERMEDIATE 2
Inferiority
In order to form superlatives of inferiority, with any adjective, you need to follow this structure:
It is important to notice that the superlative of inferiority isn’t commonly used for physical characteristics.
Leave the least important problem for tomorrow. 
Michael is the least interested student in class. 
The Least + Adjective
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
After Watching a Movie 
Danny – Van, that was the greatest movie I’ve ever seen!
Vanessa – Well, it was good but not the best one, come on. 
Danny – I loved it. I think Saul Goldman is this generation’s 
most talented actor. 
Vanessa – His co-star is the least natural, though. 
Danny – Yeah, I guess you are right.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
I N C O R R E CT
This is the most happy day of my life.
Nick is the most bad player in the team.
C O R R E CT
This is the happiest day of my life.
Nick is the worst player on the team.
Giving Advice → Suggestions and recommendations
 → You can use modals or semi-modals. 
L E S S O N 4
ADVICE GIVING: HAD BETTER
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
223
• Modal Verbs: Should and Must
• Should is frequently used when giving advice. 
If you’re driving, you shouldn’t drink.
• Must can also be used for this end, but it has a stronger meaning as it has the idea of obligation as well. 
You must take a cab if you drink alcohol. 
• Mustn’t, on the other hand, gives the idea of prohibition. 
You mustn’t drink and drive. It is against the law. 
• Ought to is a semi-modal. It has the same meaning of the modal verb should; however, it is not as common 
in everyday speech.
People ought to be more respectful to one another. 
• Have to gives an idea of necessity that exists due to external factors. 
Mike has to respect his colleagues. 
• Semi-modals: Ought To and Have To
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
224
L E S S O N 4
INTERMEDIATE 2
• Expressions 
If I were you, I would study more before the exams. 
The best thing to do is be dedicated now rather than regretting it in the future. 
Take my advice: get used to studying because you will do it forever. 
Here is what I have to say: if you don’t commit to your studies, you might regret it.
Affirmative → We had better leave before it rains. 
Negative → We had better not leave after it starts raining. 
This structure isn’t usually used in the interrogative form. However, in the negative, it is possible. 
Hadn’t we better leave before it rains? 
Had better will commonly appear in its short form: ’d
We’d better leave before it rains. 
Here are some expressions one can use to give advice. 
• Had Better 
• Had better is also a semi-modal and it is considered a strong expression. It implies there 
will be negative results if someone does not do what is suggested. 
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
225
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
At a Party 
Jackie – Man, I really want to have a martini.
John – Then have one. We must enjoy life while 
 we can. 
Jackie – Oh no...I’d better stick to soda. I’m driving. 
John – Have a martini, but then you ought to take a taxi home. 
Jackie – What do I do with my car? 
John – Leave it here. You'll have to come back tomorrow to 
 get it, of course!
Jackie – You know what? That’s not a bad idea. 
:: COMMON MISTAKES
I N C O R R E CT
You had better to tell the truth.
Henry had better don’t go alone.
C O R R E CT
You had better tell the truth.
Henry had better not go alone.
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
Connectors of Exemplification: For instance, For example, As an example, That is (to say), Such as, Namely
• Use
They are used to introduce examples; they can be used interchangeably.
Mammals are animals that produce milk to feed their babies, namely dogs, lions, and humans.
CONNECTORS: EXEMPLIFICATION AND LISTING
• Structure
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
upa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
226
L E S S O N 4
INTERMEDIATE 2
Connectors for Listing: To begin/start with, First, Second, In first place, In second place, Next, 
Then, Last but not least.
• Use
They give us an idea of order when you provide a list of things, instructions, or examples.
• Structure
Free healthcare is successfully provided in many countries, such as Canada, Australia, and France.
To solve a math problem, first you have to read the heading carefully. Then start doing 
the math according to what you read. Sum and subtract until you get to the final result. 
Last but not least, review your calculations.
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
A Project to Remodel the House
Ryan – Honey, since we are going to remodel the 
house we need to start planning.
Mary – I agree. I was thinking we could use a relaxing 
color in the living room, such as light blue or 
lilac. What do you think?
Ryan – I like it. But we need to think about other stuff 
before the color on the walls. For instance, 
first we need to work on a budget, then we 
have to negotiate price and deadlines with 
constructors, last but not least we need to 
find a place to stay while they are working in 
the house. Take a look at this checklist I made.
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
227
MODAL EXPRESSIONS: BE ABLE TO, 
BE WILLING TO, BE SUPPOSED TO
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
• Use
Be able to → to have the skill to do something / to be in a situation in which it is possible for you to do 
something
I am able to run a marathon.
Sorry, I won’t be able to help you with that.
Be willing to → to be prepared to do something
I’m willing to work overtime to finish this report today.
I missed a great job opportunity two years ago. Back then, I wasn’t willing to relocate, but now, I deeply 
regret that…
Be supposed to → to be expected to do something / to say what someone should or should not do, especially 
because of rules or because of what someone in authority has said
I was supposed to finish the report today, but I woke up with a terrible headache, so I couldn’t do much.
You are not supposed to check your messages while driving.
• Structure
Verb To Be (past, present, or future)
able to
willing to 
supposed to
Affirmative: Subject + Be + Able To / Willing To / Supposed To + Main Verb
I had a terrible backache, so I was only able to return to work after two days.
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
228
L E S S O N 4
INTERMEDIATE 2
Interrogative: Be + Subject + Able To / Willing To / Supposed To + Main Verb
Negative: Subject + Be + Not + Able To / Willing To / Supposed To + Main Verb
Being successful doesn’t mean you will never fail: it means you always answer 
“yes” when you hear the question: Are you willing to try again?
Girls, get inside! You are not supposed to play in the rain… 
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
General Manager Position
Mr. Daniels – Ms. Williams, we have an opening for the 
manager position in Boston and we think you 
are 100 percent able to fill this position…Are 
you willing to relocate?
Ms. Williams – Absolutely, Mr. Daniels. Thank you for this 
opportunity! 
Mr. Daniels – You’re welcome, and you deserve it! Please just 
make all the arrangements with HR, OK?
Ms. Williams – No problem, Mr. Daniels. Who am I supposed 
to refer to in HR?
Mr. Daniels – Look for Ms. Morris. And congratulations!
:: COMMON MISTAKES
I N C O R R E CT
I able to do this.
John supposed to be here at 9.
C O R R E CT
I am able to do this.
John is supposed to be here at 9.
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
229
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
• Structure
Offers or Invitations Accepting or Declining
Would you like to go out for lunch tomorrow? Yes, I'd love to. / Unfortunately, I can't.
Would you like some water? Yes, please. / No, thank you. I'm OK.
• Would
The modal verb would is used for hypothetical situations.
Hypothetical situation: If she had enough money, she would travel with her friends.
Real situation: She doesn't have enough money, so she will not travel with the girls.
• Would you like...?
Used for offers and invitations.
MODAL VERB: WOULD
Affirmative: Subject + Would + Main Verb + Complement 
If she had enough money, she would travel with the girls.
Negative: Subject + Would + Not + Main Verb + Complement 
If I were you, I wouldn't talk to John about this problem now.
Interrogative: Would + Subject + Main Verb + Complement? 
Would you leave your current job and come work with us?
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
230
L E S S O N 4
INTERMEDIATE 2
R E V I E W
:: STAY ALERT
I would love some coffee.→ No contraction of would: Emphasis
I'd love some coffee. → Contraction (’d): Neutral
Would you like some coffee? No, thanks. (Appropriate)
 No, I wouldn't. (Inappropriate)
:: COMMON MISTAKES
I N C O R R E CT
I will go if I had time.
C O R R E CT
I would go if I had time.
GIVING OPINION WITH COMPARATIVES AND SUPERLATIVES
I think New York is the 
best city in the world!
Oh, New York is so overrated.
Los Angeles is a much better city.
There’s nothing better than spending 
your vacation in New York.
New York is the most interesting 
city I’ve ever been to. 
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
Sabbatical Year
Jordan – What would you do if you had one year 
just for you?
Karen – I'd grab my backpack and travel for a 
whole year. I would wake up and think: 
what do I want to do today? Where do I 
want to be? And then I'd just do it!
Jordan – It would be awesome, wouldn't it?
Karen – Sure.
Jordan – Why don't you do it?
Karen – Because I’ve got a lot of bills to pay!
:: LANGUAGE IN ACTION
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
231
Let’s see some examples:
When we give opinion, we may use structures with adjectives in the comparative or in the superlative forms.
• Giving Opinion with the Comparative Form
When we want to give our opinion comparing one element to another, we will use the comparative form.Take a look at these possible structures:
• There is nothing worse/better than…
• I think it is much better to…
• I guess it’s much worse to...
• Giving Opinion with the Superlative Form
When we want to give our opinion comparing one element to all the others of the same kind, we will use the 
superlative form. Take a look at these possible structures:
• I think that the best/worst idea is to...
• The best/worst thing to do is...
• The most (adjective) idea/opinion is...
Julia – I think that the best thing to do when you decide to take a trip overseas is to plan ahead.
Katie – I agree. That’s the most important thing to do if you don’t want to have problems.
Julia – There’s nothing better than New York in the summer.
Katie – Really? I think it’s much better in the spring. Summers in New York can be really hot!
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
232
L E S S O N 5
INTERMEDIATE 2
* For both the comparative and superlative forms:
Words ending in CVC → Double the last consonant and add the termination. 
Example: BIG
 
Comparative: California is bigger than Florida. 
Superlative: Texas is the biggest American State. 
:: STAY ALERT
Although there are comparatives and superlatives of inferiority, they are not as frequently used as the ones of 
superiority. 
The movie Storm is less interesting than Thunder. The movie Thunder is more interesting than Storm. 
 or 
 The movie Storm is not as interesting as Thunder. 
prefer
Comparative Forms → Compares characteristics of two elements 
 → Superiority, Equality, or Inferiority 
Superlative Forms → Compares one element to all others of its group/kind 
 → Superiority or Inferiority 
Take a look at the table for more specific differences between them. 
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
COMPARATIVE AND SUPERLATIVE FORMS REVIEW
Superiority 
Long Adjectives 
Short Adjectives 
Irregular
Comparatives
More + Adjective + Than 
Adjective (–ER/–IER) + Than* 
Good → Better 
Bad → Worse 
Far → Farther / Further 
Little → Less 
As + Adjective + As 
Less + Adjective + Than 
Superlatives
The Most + Adjective 
The + Adjective (–EST/–IEST)*
Good → The best 
Bad → The worst 
Far → Farthest / Furthest 
Little → Least 
The Least + Adjective 
Equality
 
Long and Short Adjectives 
Inferiority
 
Long and Short Adjectives
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
233
I get stressed when I have to repeat myself too many times.
I get tired after I work out. 
I get surprised when I receive presents in ordinary days.
I get inspired when I see stories of successful people.
I get annoyed when people wake me up early.
I get frustrated when I don’t get a promotion.
I get interested when my friends talk about different things.
I get upset when I have an argument with my spouse.
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
In the Teachers’ Lounge
Al – Hey, James, can you help me choose the 
best projects to show in the festival?
James – Sure. Who made them? 
Al – My fifth graders. They had to watch movies 
and compare two of them in details. 
James – Interesting...let’s see. This one says that 
Poetry Room is more interesting than 
Lovely Writing because it teaches more 
values.
Al – Really? I guess that’s the deepest 
conclusion I’ve seen from a fifth grader.
James – Yeah...but you know...Lovely Writing is not 
as good as Poetry Room. At all!
:: COMMON MISTAKES
I N C O R R E CT
Michelle is more pretty than Sheila.
Katia is as intelligent than her classmates.
My students are more good now than before.
C O R R E CT
Michelle is prettier than Sheila.
Katia is as intelligent as her classmates.
My students are better now than before.
EXPRESSIONS WITH GET AND FEEL
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
There are different ways to express emotions in English. Let’s focus on the verbs to get and to feel. 
To Get = To Become* To Feel = Action of Feeling
*The verb to get has different meanings according to its complements and to contexts. When 
combined with adjectives, its meaning is to become, as a consequence of something.
• Expressing State: To Get + Adjective O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
234
L E S S O N 5
INTERMEDIATE 2
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
Sick 
Silvia – How do you feel?
Liam – I’m OK.
Silvia – You’re in a hospital, darling. Don’t lie to me. 
Liam – I feel fine, really. 
Silvia – I get stressed when you lie to me! How do 
you feel?
Liam – I feel awful, i have a fever, and I'm throwing 
up every five minutes. Happy?
MODAL EXPRESSIONS
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
Modal Expressions → Might sometimes substitute modal verbs 
Modal Expressions = Verb To Be + Verbs or Other Complements 
• Expressing Feelings: To Feel + Adjective 
T O F E E L B A D T O F E E L G R E AT T O F E E L A W F U L
T O F E E L U N C O M F O R TA B L E T O F E E L F I N E
Can be used in any verb form 
according to the speaker’s need.
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
235
Notice that when followed by a verbal complement, it is in the –ING form, but they can have nominal 
complements as well. 
Some people are accustomed to cold showers. 
Brazilians are used to having more than one shower a day. 
 =
Brazilians are accustomed to having more than one shower a day.
• Be About To 
When used in the present form, it indicates a very near future.
Something that is “about to happen” will happen very soon. 
It is also used with other verb forms, such as the simple past (was about to).
Gillian – Yuki, hi! Can I come in?
Yuki – Sorry, not now. We are about to go to bed. Can you come back tomorrow? 
To refer to the future, the expressions change:
It isn’t easy but you will get used to working weekends.
Being a new parent is tough but you’ll get accustomed to it.
These modal expressions can also be used with other verb forms: 
Tony was used to working until late. → Simple Past 
Nick was accustomed to sleeping on couches. → Simple Past 
When used in the past, you refer to something 
that didn’t get to be done: 
I was about to leave when you called. (I was 
getting ready to leave when you called.)
• Be Used To and Be Accustomed To 
These expressions are somewhat interchangeable as they have the same meaning. 
They are used to express customary actions.
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
abra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
236
L E S S O N 5
INTERMEDIATE 2
:: COMMON MISTAKES
I N C O R R E CT
Mike is accustomed to wake up early.
C O R R E CT
Mike is accustomed to waking up early.
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
Learning How to Cook 
Nina – Mom, I’m about to add the eggs to the batter. 
Is it necessary to keep beating? 
Fiona – Yes, darling. But slow it down a little. 
Nina – OK…it is hard to know the right moment to add 
ingredients. How do you know? 
Fiona – I’m used to making cakes, honey. You’ll be 
accustomed to it just the same, you just need 
to practice.
RELATIVE PRONOUNS
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
• Use
Who
Which
That
They refer to people, things, or ideas previously mentioned. They are either 
part of non-restrictive clause or of a restrictive clause.
• Be Necessary To 
This expression and the semi-modal have to are interchangeable.
It expresses necessity.
Doctor – Mr. Atkinson has to rest. It is necessary to keep him away from stressful situations.
When used in the past, this expression refers to 
something that didn’t happen.
It was necessary to let the cream settle, that’s why your 
pudding didn’t work out.
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
237
• Structure
Non-restrictive Clauses
They add extra information about the people, things, or ideas they refer to. They are set off by commas. If you 
take them out of the sentence, you can still make sense of what is said. 
Who – used to refer to people
Restrictive Clauses
They add essential information about the people, things, or ideas they refer to. They are not set off by 
commas. If you take them out, you are not likely to understand what is said. 
Who / That – used to refer to people
Sarah’s brother is sick.
Is this information complete? No.
Why? Because Sarah has two brothers.
You need to specify which brother you are talking about. You can use a restrictive clause.
Which – used to refer to things or ideas
My only daughter, who lives in Denver, is coming for Christmas. 
My suggestion, which nobody liked, was to postpone the trip. 
non-restrictive clause
non-restrictive clause
Sarah’s brother who is only five years old is sick. 
restrictive clause
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
238
L E S S O N 5
INTERMEDIATE 2
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
Going to the Movies
Amy – I want to see this movie with Jennifer Lawrence
 that was nominated for the Oscar. Do you want 
 to go see it later?
Sue – Sure. Let’s go to this new movie theater, which is 
just two blocks away. And let’s invite Julia. 
Amy – I met her yesterday. She said her sister is in town 
and she is spending time with her.
Sue – Oh really? Which one?
Amy – I didn’t know she had two sisters.
Sue – She does. She has an older sister, who lives 
in Texas, and a younger sister, who lives in 
California.
Amy – Hm…well, then I don’t know. But let’s call her 
anyways. She might want to go with her sister.
I N C O R R E CT
Martin, that is my cousin, is a lawyer.
This is the car who my father gave me.
C O R R E CT
Martin, who is my cousin, is a lawyer.
This is the car which my father gave me.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
The smartphone needs to be fixed.
Is this complete information? No.
Why? Because there are three smartphones.
You need to specify which smartphone needs to be fixed.
Which / That – used to refer to things or ideas
The smartphone which / that needs to be fixed is the black one.
restrictive clause
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
239
TAG QUESTIONS
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
• Use
Tag Questions → Used at the end of a sentence to confirm the statement previously made.
 → Used with all verb forms.
Let's see some other examples using other verb forms.
Simple Past: You visited London, didn't you?
 You didn't visit London, did you?
Past Continuous: The children were studying, weren't they?
 The children weren't studying, were they?
Modal Verbs: You can speak English, can't you?
 But you can't speak German, can you?
Imperative Form*: Do me a favor, will you?
 Help your sister, will you?
Some special cases are:
• Sentences with "Let's" → use "shall we"
 Let's go, shall we?
• Sentences with "I'm" → use, "aren't I"
 I am pretty smart, aren't I?
Your son doesn't eat chicken, does he?
Main sentence in the 
negative form
Tag Question in the affirmative form using the 
same verb form as in the main sentence
But he likes fish, doesn't he?
Main sentence in the 
affirmative form
Tag Question in the negative form using the 
same verb form as in the main sentence
• Structure
*You can use tag questions to soften up favors and 
requests with the imperative form. In this case, you should 
use the modal verb will.
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
240
L E S S O N 5
INTERMEDIATE 2
• Structure
I N C O R R E CT
Your brother likes this band, don't he?
You didn't finish your homework, didn't you?
He is driving, isn't it?
C O R R E CT
Your brother likes this band, doesn't he?
You didn't finish your homework, did you?
He is driving, isn't he?
:: COMMON MISTAKES
• Use
L E S S O N 6
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
CONNECTORS: REVIEW
Connectors
Addition Conclusion
Contrast Exemplification
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
The Boss is Back from Vacation
Carol – Mr. Connan is back from vacation tomorrow, isn't he?
Rachel – Yes! And I hope he's more relaxed! He traveled to 
Europe with his family, didn't he?
Carol – I don't know. But Mr. Connan? Relaxed? Do you really 
believe that? It's not possible, is it? 
Rachel – Well, last year he came back as a new person. It was 
fantastic.
Carol – True! I remember that...but it didn't last more than a 
week, did it?
Rachel – Something close to that…Yeah, I guess you're right.
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
241
Amy is a skilledprofessional and she is also a great team player.
Amy is a skilled professional. Besides that, she is a great team player.
Amy is a skilled professional. Moreover, she is a great team player.
Amy is a skilled professional. Furthermore, she is a great team player.
Amy is a young woman but she is already a highly skilled professional.
Although / Even though Amy is still young, she is a highly skilled professional.
Amy is a young woman. However, she is already a highly skilled professional.
Despite being young, Amy is a highly skilled professional.
Amy is a highly skilled professional at a very young age. So, I think the company 
should keep on investing in her.
Amy is a highly skilled professional at a very young age. As a conclusion, I think the 
company should keep on investing in her.
As we have seen, Amy is a highly skilled professional at a very young age. Because 
of that, I think the company should keep on investing in her.
Amy is a highly skilled professional. She has great ideas, for instance, she was the 
one who improved our customer service.
Amy is a highly skilled professional. She has great ideas. As an example, she was the 
one who improved our customer service.
Amy is a highly skilled professional. She has great ideas, such as improving our 
customer service.
Amy is a highly skilled professional. She has great ideas, namely improving our 
customer service.
A
dd
iti
on
C
on
tr
as
t
C
on
cl
us
io
n
Ex
em
pl
ic
at
io
n
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
Planning a Trip
Matt – Take a look at these deals. We should take 
a trip on the holidays, baby. We’ll be able to 
relax and the kids are going to have fun.
Chloe – I agree. We could go to a beach such as St. 
Pete Beach or Siesta Key.
Matt – They are great places, but we have visited 
those beaches already. Besides, they are 
right here in Florida. So, I was thinking, 
we could go a bit farther, California, for 
example.
Chloe – I’d love to go to California. However, I’m not 
sure we’ll be able to afford a family trip to 
California on the holidays.
Matt – Let’s look it up.
:: STAY ALERT
And / But / So → In formal written language, it is advisable to try to replace them.
Furthermore / Moreover → More frequent in formal written language
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
242
L E S S O N 6
INTERMEDIATE 2
SIMPLE PRESENT AND PRESENT CONTINUOUS FOR FUTURE
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
• Simple Present 
Used to refer to actions that are part of a schedule. The use of time expressions is extremely important to 
indicate the future.
Future can be expressed in different ways in English:
I N C O R R E CT
We had one setback however the company is 
growing fast.
Despite my father is eighty-five years old, he is a 
very active man.
Donna is a talented musician, although she could 
never live off her music.
C O R R E CT
We had one setback. However, the company is 
growing fast.
Despite his age, my father is a very active man.
Although Donna is a talented musician, she could 
never live off her music.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
Let’s focus on the use of the present forms to refer to the future. 
Christmas is in December. I can’t travel because I work this weekend. 
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
243
• Present Continuous
Used to refer to appointments, dates, or commitments that are pre-arranged and confirmed. 
My flight departs at eight a.m. 
I’m seeing the doctor tomorrow at nine a.m. 
I’m having lunch with my boss tomorrow at one p.m. 
I’m talking with the suppliers tomorrow at four p.m. 
I’m having dinner with Leo tomorrow at eight p.m. 
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
Arranging a Trip 
Jackie – Hey Julie, let’s make a group trip to 
Vermont this weekend? 
Julie – I can't make it. It’s my grandmother’s 
birthday on Sunday. 
Jackie – How about the following weekend?
Julie – Nick is coming this month...let me see. 
Yep, Nick arrives on Saturday. 
Jackie – Really? Oh well, we’re all going this 
weekend then. We’ll plan something 
together some other time.
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
244
L E S S O N 6
INTERMEDIATE 2
• Would Rather (than) 
Interrogative → Would you rather watch a movie at home than at the theater?
Affirmative → I would rather go to the theater.
Negative → I would rather not stay home. 
:: STAY ALERT
→ The short form “I’d rather” is commonly used in spoken and informal written language. 
→ The word “not” doesn’t get a short form with would rather. 
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
An Invitation
Jack – Lyla, would you like to hit a nightclub tonight?
Lyla – I’d rather do something quieter, like a restaurant. 
Jack – OK, then. Would you rather eat a burger than fried chicken?
Lyla – I’d rather not eat heavy food. Japanese? 
Jack – Fine. It’s a date then. 
:: COMMON MISTAKES
I N C O R R E CT
I wouldn’t rather visit grandma now. 
Stu would rather to go home.
C O R R E CT
I would rather not visit grandma now. 
Stu would rather go home.
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
Expressing Preference → Prefer
 → Would Rather = Would Prefer To 
WOULD RATHER AND OTHER WAYS TO EXPRESS PREFERENCE
Things
Subject + Verb To Prefer + Thing 1 + To + Thing 2 
Nick prefers soccer to volleyball. 
Actions 
Subject + Verb To Prefer + Verb in Infinitive + Rather Than + Verb in Infinitive or –ING + Complement
Julia prefers to watch a movie rather than eat/eating out. 
• Verb To Prefer 
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
245
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
Modal Expressions → Contain similar meanings to those of modal verbs.
 → Might substitute modal verbs in certain situations.
Modal Expressions = Verb To Be + Verbs or Other Complements
Verb To Be can be used in any verb form depending on the speaker’s needs and intentions.
MODAL VERBS AND MODAL EXPRESSIONS REVIEW
Modal Verbs: verbs used to express mood (such as ability, obligation, necessity, or possibility) according to 
speakers’ judgment. They do not infer an idea of time nor a factual aspect to verbs. 
Will: used to express inevitability or prediction 
based on opinion
Might: used to talk about remote probability
Could: used to talk about ability in the past, 
remote possibility, and to make requests
Should: used to give advice
Can: used to talk about ability in the present, 
possibility, and requests
Must: used to express obligation and to make 
assumptions; the negative form is used 
for prohibition
May: usedto talk about probability and to make 
 polite requests
Would: used to talk about hypotheses
• Be Able To → Ability 
In the present, it can substitute can.
Lilian can cook perfectly. = Lilian is able to cook perfectly. 
In the past, it can substitute could.
Lenny could play the piano as a child. = Lenny was able to play the piano as a child. 
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
246
L E S S O N 6
INTERMEDIATE 2
• Be Supposed To → Obligation and Expectation (external)
It can substitute the semi-modal have to. 
You’re supposed to be careful when working with fire. = You have to be careful when working with fire. 
• Be Willing To → to be prepared to do something or having no objection against doing something 
Ted is willing to babysit his sister. = Ted has no objection against babysitting his sister. 
• Be Used To and Be Accustomed To → customary actions
Paul is used to writing contracts. = Paul is accustomed to writing contracts. 
Dad was used to sleeping all night until I was born. = Dad was accustomed to sleeping all night until I was born.
• Be About To → to be close to happening
Mrs. Tyler – Sarah, darling, do you have a confirmation from 
Stuart’s office? 
Sarah – Not yet, ma’am. I’m about to call them…I’ll let you 
know when I get their OK.
• Be Necessary To / Be Necessary That → necessity
Substitutes need to or have to with some changes in the sentence structure. 
Tell Kurt he needs to be here at 5 p.m. = Tell Kurt it’s necessary that he be here at 5 p.m
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
Frank – Can we go now? We were supposed to 
leave at five today…It’s five thirty!
Peter – I’m sorry, but I won’t be able to go with 
you…I have this report to finish.
Frank – How long will it take?
Peter – I am about to start the last section…some 
twenty minutes more, I guess.
Frank – All right, I’ll wait. At least I won’t face the 
traffic jam alone. When we started in this job, 
we used to leave at four…now, God knows 
the time we’ll leave! Well, I’ll check my 
emails while I wait.
In the Office 
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
248
INTERMEDIATE 3
L E S S O N 1
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
Reporting a Story → Retelling a Story 
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
Gossiping
Nathan – Jack, listen up. Did you hear about 
Mr. Thompson?
Jack – What about him? Janet told me there was 
 something going on in his office. 
Nathan – Dude, Angel said Mr. Thompson’s wife 
 came here and made a scene. 
Jack – Really? But why? 
Nathan – Apparently, she asked him why he didn’t 
 sleep at home and she didn’t believe his answer. 
Jack – Poor guy...
When retelling a story, we usually use the verbs Say (something), Tell (a story/someone something), and Ask (a 
question or favor). 
• Retelling something that someone told you or that you overheard
Mary told me she is getting married next year.
She said that it will be a great party. 
I asked her if she needed my help. 
She asked me to be her bridesmaid. 
I said that it would be an honor. 
Then, I asked her what she needed me to do. 
BASIC REPORTING STRATEGIES
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
249
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
Breaking the News 
Katia – Honey, I need to tell you something. 
Charles – What is it? Good or bad? 
Katia – Well…both. I am afraid that we will have to 
 adjust our expenses. 
Charles – Oh, OK. 
Katia – And the good news is that you’ll be a father! 
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
• Giving Good News 
• Giving Bad News 
When you have news that will make people happy, there are some expressions you can use: 
When you have news that will make people sad, angry, or frustrated, you use expressions that will prepare 
the listener for the bad news.
The good news is...
The good thing is...
Here is some great news...
I'm glad to tell you… 
I'm really thrilled that… 
I am happy to say that…
The bad news is...
Unfortunately...
How can I put this...
I regret to say that...
I'm sorry to say that...
I am afraid that...
Real Estate Agent: I’m happy to say 
that the house is yours, Mr. Taylor.
Unfortunately, we need to continue 
with the medication.
GIVING GOOD AND BAD NEWS
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
250
L E S S O N 1
INTERMEDIATE 3
Before focusing on this relation of continuity or of relevance between the past and the present expressed by 
the Present Perfect, let’s take a look at its structure.
Affirmative → Subject + Have/Has + Verb in Past Participle + Complement 
 
 Juliet has fallen in love with Romeo. 
 My students have read Romeo and Juliet many times. 
Negative → Subject + Have Not/Has Not + Verb in Past Participle + Complement
 
 I haven’t eaten anything since breakfast. I’m very hungry. 
 Nina is a vegetarian. She hasn’t had any meat for years. 
Interrogative → Have/Has + Subject + Verb in Past Participle + Complement
 Have you thought about modeling?
 Has your friend confirmed attendance to the wedding?
Nick – What are you doing? 
Leo – I’m studying this new software, but it’s so difficult. 
Nick – Oh, I have used this before. Let me try to help you.
Nick used the same software at some moment in the past and, because of that, he can help Leo now. 
The exact time when Nick used the software is not relevant to this situation, only his current knowledge. 
PRESENT PERFECT, SINCE AND FOR
Present Perfect → Refers to the past from a present perspective
 → Actions that happened in the past but affect the present → Relevance
 → Actions that started in the past and continue into the present → Continuity
• Past Participle
Regular Verbs → Same form as in the simple past → Terminations –D, –ED, or –IED
Irregular Verbs → Third column of the list found at the end of this Language Guide
• First Use—Present Perfect: Action that is Relevant to the Present 
It refers to an action or event that happened in the past with relevance, influence, or results in the present, 
whose time is unknown or irrelevant.
Take a look at the dialogue.
:: USE AND STRUCTUREPast (?) Present
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
251
Verbs → Intransitive → Don’t require complements to complete meaning.
 → Transitive → Require complements to complete meaning. → Nouns or Pronouns
 → Verbs → Infinitive and Gerund
 → Only Infinitive
 → Only Gerund
• Second Use—Present Perfect: Focus on Continuity
It refers to an action or event that started in the past and continues into the present.
Take a look:
I’ve studied English. → Completed action in the past.
I’ve studied English since 1995. → Since marks the beginning of the action, so it still happens in the present.
Now, we use for to refer to the duration of the activity, but it does not necessarily infer that it has a continuous 
aspect.
I’ve studied English for twenty years. → Open to two interpretations depending on context:
1. The action started twenty years ago and it still happens in the present.
2. The action lasted twenty years but has been completed already.
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
Past Present
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
Talking About the News 
Terry – Lana, have you heard about the new immigrant policy? 
Lana – I have. Immigration has been a controversial issue for a long time, but I think they’ll find a solution. 
Terry – Hopefully, these people will settle somewhere. They’ve walked a thousand miles since they left their country. 
Lana – There will be a good solution. There has to be one. 
:: COMMON MISTAKES
I N C O R R E CT
Olga has worked in a bank in 1985.
C O R R E CT
Olga has worked in a bank.
Olga worked in a bank in 1985.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
VERBS FOLLOWED BY GERUND OR INFINITIVE 
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
252
L E S S O N 1
INTERMEDIATE 3
• Verbs that take only the Infinitive as a complement:
Agree → Michael agreed to speak to the officer. 
Fail → Lana fails to understand the reason we moved out. 
Request → The defense requests to approach the bench. 
Swear → I swear to tell the truth, no matter what. 
Plan → Leo plans to travel on his own next summer. 
Prepare → Bia got married and now she’s preparing to be a mother. 
Choose → We choose to save up to buy a car. 
Get → This is your final chance. You won’t get to try again. 
Wait → Wait to see what’s coming next!
Seem → Larry seems to be worried about something. 
Want → I really want to go on vacation soon.
Wish → My mother wishes to live more than one hundred years. 
Ask → We told Paul we were driving home and he asked to come with us. 
• Verbs and expressions that take only the Gerund as a complement:
Enjoy
Feel like
Finish
Consider
Can't help
Suggest
Recommend
Miss
Quit
Understand
Practice
→ Layla enjoys cooking lunch for her family. 
→ I don’t feel like playing sports at night. 
→ Chris needs to finish doing the homework.
→ Nicholas never considered having pets. 
→ Douglas can’t help disagreeing with his parents.
→ Mary suggested taking a cab instead of driving to the wedding. 
→ Specialists recommend sleeping in complete darkness. 
→ I miss having my weekends free. 
→ Julia quit smoking years ago. 
→ The teacher understands his being late. 
→ Today we’re going to practice parking.
Some verbs will accept different complements according to the meaning they have. 
Verb to Ask
Meaning “request” → He asked to come with us. 
Meaning “seek an answer” → He asked a question. 
In both possibilities, you can include an object. 
He asked us to come along. 
He asked me a question.
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
253
L E S S O N 2
Structure of an Argumentative Essay
Argumentation Essay in Spoken Language
Introduction → Presents the main idea and conflict in one paragraph.
Development → Three paragraphs with exposition of ideas and solutions of conflicts.
Conclusion → Wraps up the text. No new ideas can appear in this part of the text.
→ The conversation must have a beginning, a middle, and an end.
→ The conversation only ends when the argument is based on evidence.
→ If the strategies and steps aren’t followed, probably there will be questions to gather extra information 
 and then the audience will reach a conclusion.
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
Online Chatting
Peter – Hey, Sara. Let’s do something tonight. Dinner, 
 bowling? 
Sara – I don’t feel like going out tonight. 
Peter – Right...so what do you want to do? 
Sara – Would you consider playing a game online?
Peter – Sure. Choose one and let’s do it! 
:: COMMON MISTAKES
I N C O R R E CT
Joan enjoys to play chess.
C O R R E CT
Joan enjoys playing chess. 
ARGUMENTATIVE STRATEGIES: QUOTATIONS AND OTHER SOURCES
Argumentation → Based on research, analysis, and critical view on the topic.
 → Not only covers the topic but also the writer’s point of view. 
 → The writer or the speaker defends the point of view using data as support.
 → Usually written in the third person. 
There are some resources and techniques one can follow to share data and to support opinion convincingly.
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
254
L E S S O N 2
INTERMEDIATE 3
According to (name of the author)... 
As (name of the author) states...
As stated by (name of the author)...
(Name of the author) states that...
Important Note: The use of an author’s words, even if paraphrased, without due credit is 
what constitutes plagiarism (appropriation of one’s work and ideas taking them as one’s 
own). It is considered an ethical foul and undermines the credibility of an author for good. 
• Rhetorical Strategies 
1) Appeal to logic or to reason, usually through inductive or deductive reasoning. 
 The writer or speaker must be careful not to use fallacies, which are an oversimplification of logic. 
 Jack is a boy. Jack is violent. All boys are violent. (This is a fallacy.)
2) Deal with the character, credibility, and reliability of the writer. Actions like choosing reliable sources, 
 respecting the reader/listener, organizing ideas in the text, and proofreading.
3) Deal with the reader's emotions. It shows the writer or speaker is connected with the reader by making 
 the text more personal and in ways to which the recipient can relate. 
• Analyzing Pros and Cons
Taking into consideration positive and negative aspects will help make a reasonable analysis in your speech 
or in your text. They will also help you reach a conclusion so you can structure your textlike this: 
Paragraph 1 – Introduction 
Paragraph 2 – Positive aspects 
Paragraph 3 – Negative aspects 
Paragraph 4 – Evaluation of both positive and negative aspects
Paragraph 5 – Conclusion 
• Quotations 
There are different techniques to use quotations in writing. Direct quotations are extracts of an author’s work 
or opinion, copied between quotes (“”), followed by credits to the original author. 
In academic writing, there are set rules for direct quotations whose reference (author and source of research) 
will appear in the footnote. 
Indirect quotations don’t usually come between quotes but are usually introduced by phrases that indicate 
you’re about to quote someone:
Specificities Facts
SpecificitiesGeneralizations
INDUCTIVE REASONING DEDUCTIVE REASONING
Generalizations
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
255
Remember that no argumentation is made without support, so, you can justify your 
conclusions using connectors and indicating references.
Human beings must be careful when killing animals because they balance the 
environment, according to... 
• Paraphrase 
Paraphrases can be explained by the chunk of 
language “in other words.” When you paraphrase 
an extract or an idea, you say the same thing 
with different words. The original author must be 
credited as well. 
• Summary
Summaries are a short version of an original text that concentrates on its main idea, leaving out details, and 
are written with your own words. Again, the original author must be credited. 
Romeo and Juliet, tragedy written by William Shakespeare, narrates a tragic love story of a couple from 
diverging families in ancient Verona. 
Parental Control on the Use of Technology
Argumentative Strategy: Analyzing Pros and Cons
It is vital that parents pay special attention to how their kids use technology. Parental control may prevent 
kids from downloading inappropriate content or from browsing dangerous websites; however, a certain 
amount of freedom is important to foster kids’ independence and boost learning.
Argumentative Strategy: Narrations
In the past, children had limited access to technology: they could play video games or watch TV or even 
use the computer for a limited amount of time and with the supervision of an adult. Nowadays, because 
parents do not have much available time, kids have more freedom to use technology and this could be 
dangerous.
Argumentative Strategy: Quotations
Herbert Simon once said, “One finds limits by pushing them.” Kids need to have enough freedom to use 
technology so that they can discover the boundaries they must respect.
René Descartes said: 
I think, therefore I am.
Paraphrase – For René Descartes, 
rationality defines men. 
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
• Narrations 
Narrations can be used as means to exemplify the author’s point related to data collected during research. 
These narrations, if based on the author’s experience, don’t need to be credited. 
René Descartes believed that rationality defines men and that seems to be true since intellectuals are the 
ones who define the principles that guide our society as we learn at school.
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
256
L E S S O N 2
INTERMEDIATE 3
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
Comparative Forms → Compare specific characteristics of two elements.
 → Superiority → Long Adjectives / Short Adjectives / Irregular Forms 
 → Equality 
 → Inferiority
• Irregular Comparatives 
Good → Better Little → Less
Bad → Worse Far → Further (metaphorical distance) / Farther (physical distance)
Russia is bigger than the U.S.A. Paulie’s hand is smaller than her brother's.
COMPARATIVE FORMS REVIEW 
AND NON-GRADABLE ADJECTIVES
Spelling Rules
Words Ending in C.V.C. → Double the last consonant and add the termination. 
Original adjective ending in Consonant + –Y → Drop the –Y and add –IER 
All the other short adjectives → Add –ER
Superiority 
• Long Adjectives → More + Adjective + Than
Martha is more intelligent than Anna. 
Jackie is more responsible than Jake. 
• Short Adjectives → Adjective (–ER or –IER) + Than
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
257
Equality
Structure → As + Adjective + As 
Nick is as handsome as Pete. 
Canada is as cold as Russia. 
Tina is less attached to the family dog than Lia.
*Notice that the comparative of inferiority is not as used as the other types of comparatives. 
Wonderful
Marvelous
Terrific
Excellent
Amazing
Awesome
Fantastic
Incredible
Absolute
Horrible
Terrible
Awful
Delicious
Infinite
Ridiculous
Freezing
Dead
Impossible
Gail is less interested in cooking than her husband.
Inferiority
Structure → Less + Adjective + Than
Non-gradable Adjectives 
Non-gradable adjectives are adjectives that cannot be measured because they are extreme. 
For example: something that is wonderful has the quality of being incomparable in regards of how good it is 
because it is “too good.”
Here are some examples of non-gradable adjectives:
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
258
L E S S O N 2
INTERMEDIATE 3
:: STAY ALERT
:: COMMON MISTAKES
I N C O R R E CT
Chocolate is more delicious than fruits.
Mark is more smart than his brother.
Tommy is funner than Samuel.
C O R R E CT
Chocolate is tastier than fruits.
Mark is smarter than his brother.
Tommy is more fun than Samuel.
Teachers' Meeting
Parker – In my class, I don’t have any disciplinary problems. There is one student that is 
lazier than the others, but they behave well. 
Logan – As for me, I have one situation. Jack Morrow is the best student in class but 
less collaborative with the class than any other student because he is too 
arrogant. 
Parker – Is the class rejecting him?
Logan – They are. I try to control it, but they are stronger than me in that sense. 
Parker – Have you tried to have a conversation with Jack? Maybe he’ll understand that 
making friends is as important as getting good grades. 
In English, syllables are counted by the way the words are pronounced. Compare: 
Small vs. Quiet
*If you’re not sure about the syllable division, check an online dictionary.
Certain adjectives will not follow the original rule or are more common with the particle more: 
Fun → The movies are more fun than the theater.
Common → Potatoes are more common than rice in certain cultures. 
(Commoner is also possible, but not frequently used.)
Simple → Pasta is more simpleto cook than stew. (Simpler is also possible.) 
Quiet → Tommy is more quiet than usual. (Quieter is also possible.)
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
259
PRESENT PERFECT: YET, NEVER, ALWAYS, EVER, AND ALREADY
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
• Structure
Affirmative
Subject + Have/Has* + Verb in Past Participle + Complement
Johnny has lived in Barcelona.
* In spoken and informal written language, the short form 've/'s is normally used.
Negative 
Subject + Have Not/Has Not* + Verb in Past Participle + Complement
 We have not been abroad yet.
* In spoken and informal written language, the short form Haven’t/Hasn’t is normally used.
 
Interrogative 
Have/Has + Subject + Verb in Past Participle + Complement
 Have you traveled by plane?
Present Perfect with Adverbs
Position of Adverbs → Generally between the auxiliary verb have and the main verb 
 → Exception: “Yet” frequently comes at the end of the sentence 
Now, let’s see how these adverbs work in context:
1. Always 
Context: Timmy spends a lot of money on trips and his dad doesn’t understand it. 
Paul – Mary, Timmy is losing control. He needs to be more responsible. 
Mary – Don’t be like that. Timmy has always loved to travel and he does what he wants with his money. 
 (Always → 100% of time since he was born)
→
→
→ → → →
→ → →
→ → →
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
260
L E S S O N 2
INTERMEDIATE 3
2. Never 
Context: Peter and Janet are receiving Julia for dinner and Peter suggests ordering Japanese. 
Peter – So, let’s order some Japanese tonight?
Janet – I don’t know. Julia has never eaten Japanese food, maybe Italian would be better. 
 (Never → 0% of time since she was born)
3. Already
Context: Ian is planning his holiday and he is thinking about going to Jamaica but he wants tips. 
Ian – Mark, have you been to Jamaica? I’m looking for tips. 
Mark – Well, I haven’t, but Michael has already traveled to Jamaica, he might shed some light there. 
 (Already → Before now)
4. Ever 
Context: Mia is enrolling at a Spanish course and it is her placement exam. 
Coordinator – So, Mia, Have you ever studied a foreign language? 
Mia – Not really. I took some classes at school, but nothing much. 
 (Ever → At any time)
5. Yet
Context: Ken wants to take his girlfriend on a surprise trip and he is planning it with her mother. 
Ken – Maggie, I want to surprise Stacy with a trip, but I don’t know where to go. 
Maggie – Well, she hasn’t been to China nor Japan yet, but I know she loves Asian culture.
 (Yet → At this time, but might sometime in the future)
:: STAY ALERT
1. The adverbs already and yet have certain similarities.
Before Now
Teacher Asking Students about the Exercise
Teacher – Have you already finished? 
Student – I haven’t finished yet. 
Before now, but more urgent and inferring impatience.
The teacher assigned an exercise, but it’s been ten minutes and John hasn't finished. 
Teacher – John, have you finished yet? 
John – In a minute. 
2. The word yet functions as an adverb with the present perfect but it may also function as a conjunction.
I haven’t been to London yet. → Adverb
I haven’t been to London. Yet, I’d love to go. → Conjunction similar to But
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
261
Transitive Verbs → Nouns or pronouns as complements 
 → Verbs as complements → Only gerund or only infinitive
 → Infinitive and Gerund → No change in meaning
 → With change in meaning
• Verbs that may be followed by gerund or by infinitive without change in meaning:
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
:: COMMON MISTAKES
I N C O R R E CT
I always have wanted to go backpacking.
C O R R E CT
I have always wanted to go backpacking.
VERBS FOLLOWED BY GERUND AND 
INFINITIVE WITH NO CHANGE IN MEANING
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
Backpacking
Gilbert – So, Harry, where are we backpacking 
 this summer? 
Harry – I was thinking...maybe Mexico.
Gilbert – I have already been to Mexico. I haven’t 
 been to Costa Rica yet...what do you think?
Harry – I’ve always wanted to go there. So, one 
 destination is set. 
Gilbert – OK...so from Costa Rica we go to...Cuba?
Harry – Oh, interesting. I’ve never thought about 
 going there, but let’s check other options.
Gilbert – Right. Have you ever been to Aruba? 
Harry – No! Dude, Central America is awesome, 
but there are too many options!
Joan started to take English classes. 
= Joan started taking English classes.
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
262
L E S S O N 2
INTERMEDIATE 3
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
Professor Peters began to talk at nine a.m. 
= Professor Peters began talking at nine a.m. 
My students hate to take tests. 
= My students hate taking tests. 
Hugo loves to chat online. 
= Hugo loves chatting online. 
Grant prefers to travel by car. 
= Grant prefers traveling by car. 
Mario can’t stand waking up early. 
= Mario can’t stand to wake up early. 
Lenny will continue to study languages. 
= Lenny will continue studying languages. 
A Lecture
Mr. Alba – Hi, Director Barrymore. What time should 
 I start talking? 
Director – You can start to deliver your lecture at 
 ten a.m., after all the audience arrives. 
Mr. Alba – What if I am interrupted by someone 
 entering the room? 
Director – Continue talking even if people get lost. 
 It’s not your fault they’re late.
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
263
L E S S O N 3
Argumentative Strategies → Rhetorical Strategies 
 → Analyzing Pros and Cons 
 → Summaries
 → Paraphrasing
 → Quotation
 → Narration
Advice-giving Strategies → Using Commands
 → Suggestions
 → Hypothesis 
 → Modal, Semi-modals, and Modal Expressions
To review Argumentative Strategies, refer to Intermediate 3 Lesson 2, Argumentative Strategies.
Giving Advice by Using Commands (Imperatives) 
The use of Imperatives to give advice is a common resource. 
It is important to mind your tone ofvoice when using it. 
Save a percentage of your salary every month if you want to buy a house. 
ARGUMENTATIVE AND ADVICE-GIVING STRATEGIES
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
What advice can they get?
This family wants to buy a house and save for their children’s education. 
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
264
L E S S O N 3
INTERMEDIATE 3
You must decide what you want to do with your money. 
You should save a little every month. 
You ought to plan your finances wisely.
You mustn’t spend too much on unnecessary things. 
Modals 
Should → Advice
Must → Strong Advice
Mustn’t → Prohibition
Semi-modals
Ought to → Advice
Have to → Necessity
Modal Expressions
It is advisable to...
It is recommended to...
I highly recommend you...
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
Asking Advice
Ian – Mary, I just can’t reach a decision. Can you 
help me with something? 
Mary – Sure. What’s up? 
Ian – Well, I’ve been saving up for years in order 
to start my own business. That’s what I’ve 
always dreamed of doing. But what should 
I do? Open a bar or a store? 
Mary – Well, if I were you, I would think of what I 
like most. A bar is open at night, a store, 
during the day. You know, when I was at 
college, I worked at a bar and it was very 
tiring. 
Ian – Why don’t you study psychology? You’re good at this! What else? 
Mary – You should take into consideration which you like most and which investment is possible. 
Ian – Oh, I see. You could be my business partner, huh? You’re good with business. 
Mary – Well, I haven’t heard your decision yet. 
Giving Advice by Raising Hypothesis
If I were you, I would ask for an accountant’s help to start a business. 
If I were in your shoes, I would wait a while before investing all my money. 
• Modals, Semi-modals, and Modal Expressions
How about saving up for your children’s education now? 
You could seek a personal finance consultant. 
Giving Advice by Using Suggestions 
Don’t you think it’s a good idea to have a bank account? 
Why don’t you start planning your finances for the future?
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
265
How to Make Pasta
First, pour one liter of still water in a pan. 
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
EXPLAINING PROCEDURES: EXPRESSING SEQUENCE
Second, add a pinch of salt and turn the stove on. 
Then, when the water boils, put the pasta into the 
boiling water. 
Third, get the pasta you want to use and set aside 
the portion you need.
Right after that, stir the pasta to prevent it from 
sticking.
After that/Afterwards, check the pasta every few 
minutes until it is al dente. 
Explaining Procedures = Giving Instructions → Sequence of Steps to Follow 
• Expressions Used to Express Sequence
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
266
L E S S O N 3
INTERMEDIATE 3
Finish by draining the pasta with a colander. 
Leave it aside while you prepare the sauce. 
To make the sauce, start by stir-frying some 
chopped onions and garlic in olive oil. 
Then, add some chopped tomatoes. After they’re soft, add some water and bring it to a boil. 
Finish by seasoning it to taste and serve it hot on top 
of the pasta. 
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
Healthy Egg
Mandy – Abby, I saw on the Internet that you can fry 
 an egg without oil. Do you know how?
Abby – I do, actually. Do you have a nonstick skillet?
Mandy – Yes, I do. 
Abby – So, first you heat the skillet, then you crack 
 the egg in it. After that, you lower the heat 
 and put a lid on the pan. 
Mandy – OK...
Abby – When it’s slightly cooked, you pour some 
 water around the egg and put the lid back on. 
Mandy – Now, that is interesting! I’ll try that. Thanks!
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
267
Present → It refers to an action or event that started in the past and continues up to now.
Perfect → The speaker focuses on showing the progression or the continuity of this action or event.
Continuous → When referring to continuity, the present perfect continuous and the present perfect are 
interchangeable.
PRESENT PERFECT CONTINUOUS
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
• Timeline
• Structure
Affirmative → Subject + Have/Has + Been + Verb in –ING Form
I’ve been doing exercises every day 
in order to lose weight.
Turk has been traveling a lot on 
business.
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
268
L E S S O N 3
INTERMEDIATE 3
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
Gabe – Hey, Fred, why the long face? Are you worried about 
anything?
Fred – Hi, Gabe. I am a little worried about my professional future. 
Gabe – Oh, yeah? What is up? 
Fred – I haven’t been feeling like coming to work, you know? 
I think I need a change. 
Gabe – That’s not a bad thing. What have you been doing about 
this feeling of yours? 
Fred – Well, I’ve been looking for courses and for other careers, 
but I can’t find something I’m passionate about. 
Gabe – You won’t know unless you try. I say you take a course. In 
the meantime, live with that strange feeling.
Negative → Subject + Have not/Haven’t or Has not/Hasn’t + Been + Verb in –ING Form 
Leo hasn’t been practicing the piano lately. 
The students haven’t been feeling enthusiastic about the new activities. 
Interrogative → Have/Has + Subject + Been + Verb in –ING Form
Have Tommy and Stella been going out together?
Has the company been hiring new employees?
:: STAY ALERT
The present perfect may also refer to a continuous action and, in such case, it can be used instead of the 
present perfect continuous with the difference that the latter leaves no question as to the progress of the 
action in the present moment. 
Mike has studied English. (It is unclear if he still studies English, but maybe he still does.)
Mike has been studying English. (There is no doubt that he is still studying English.) 
:: COMMON MISTAKES
I N C O R R E CT
I’ve been drive a lot lately.
C O R R E CT
I’ve been driving a lot lately.
VERBS FOLLOWED BY GERUND AND INFINITIVE WITH CHANGE IN MEANING
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
Transitive Verbs → Nouns or pronouns as complements 
 → Verbs as complements→ Only gerund or only infinitive
 → Infinitive and Gerund → No change in meaning
 → With change in meaning
Changes 
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
269
• Verbs that take both gerund and infinitive with change in meaning
To Forget 
To Remember
Lilian forgot to call her husband. → She had to do something but she forgot to. 
Lilian forgot calling her husband. → She did call her husband but she doesn’t remember having done it. 
Mick remembered to tell Mary to wait. → He had to do something and he didn’t forget to. 
Mick remembers telling Mary to wait. → He remembers something he did in the past. 
To Go On 
Kim must go on working on her report. → To go on, in this case, means “to continue.” 
Kim went on to explain things instead of working on her report. → To go on here means a change in action. 
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
270
L E S S O N 3
INTERMEDIATE 3
To Stop
To Try
John stopped the game to grab a bite. → He stopped something in order to do something else. 
John stopped playing the game. → He quit an ongoing action.
Try restarting the program to see if it works better. → To make an experiment.
Try to restart the program if the computer doesn’t freeze. → To make an effort to do something difficult.* 
*In this situation, it is also possible to use the gerund. 
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
Making Amends
Henry – I’ve tried calling Jessica, I’ve tried emailing her...she just won’t talk to me. 
Leo – You screwed up big time, man. Why don’t you try to talk to her in person?
Henry – Do you think so? She stopped going to the gym after we had that argument. 
Leo – OK, stop to think for a moment. She has to go to work, right? She still lives 
in the same house, right?
Henry – I don’t want to stalk her. 
Leo – I know it isn’t good but if she won’t talk to you...
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
271
L E S S O N 4
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
Explaining Procedures = Giving Instructions → Sequence of Steps to Follow 
→ Call Attention to Important Steps → Reminders
Don't forget to adjust the salt before serving. Remember to ask your guests if they eat meat. 
EXPLAINING PROCEDURES: REMINDERS
Bear in mind that not 
everybody likes spicy food. 
Keep in mind that when you host a dinner party, 
you must think carefully about the menu. 
It's important to serve even portions so 
everybody has the same quantity of food.
Make sure you protect your hand when taking 
baking trays out of the oven. 
• Reminders
For example: You are going to host a dinner party but there are some important things to take into 
consideration if you want it to be a success. 
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L E S S O N 4
INTERMEDIATE 3
272
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
Birthday Party
Diana – Mom, I don’t know where to start. There are 
 a lot of things to do for my birthday party. 
Silvia – First, make the guest list. Don’t forget that 
 we can’t have more than thirty people here. 
Diana – OK…then what? 
Silvia – Then, we need to think about the food we’ll 
 serve and how much soda to buy. 
Diana – Right…bear in mind that Michael doesn’t 
 drink soda, so we need juice too. 
Silvia – Juice, OK. Come on, let’s get it done. 
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
• Use
Paired Conjunctions → Used to give options: Either…or…
 Used to deny both options: Neither…nor…
• Structure
1. Frequently used before equivalent elements in a sentence.
Either…or…
PAIRED CONJUNCTIONS: EITHER…OR AND NEITHER…NOR
We can go either to park or to the movies. What do you prefer?
(Used before the adverbial phrases)
( ) ( )
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
273
We’ll use the money either to go on a family trip or to buy a new car. Choose one.
(Used before the verbs)
( ) ( )
Neither…nor...
We’ll go neither to the park nor to the movies. You didn’t do your homework.
(Used before the adverbial phrases)
We’ll use the money neither to go on a family trip nor to buy a new car. We’ll save it for the kids’ college.
(Used before the verbs)
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L E S S O N 4
INTERMEDIATE 3
274
2. When used before two subjects, the verb agrees with the last subject.
First Subject Second Subject
Either Roxy or Melina is picking you up at the airport.
First Subject Second Subject
Neither your sister nor your brothers are going to the party.
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
Son – Mom, I want neither the chicken nor the salad. 
Can I have just the dessert?
Mom – Absolutely not. But you can choose: You can 
have either chicken or fish. What do you prefer?
Son – Fish, I guess.
Mom – And you also have to eat some vegetables. 
You can have either the lettuce or the tomatoes.
Son – Tomatoes, please.
Mom – OK, then. You must eat it up. If don’t, you’ll have 
neither chocolate nor ice cream for dessert.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
I N C O R R E CT
You can have or the chocolate or the ice cream.
I won’t buy neither the red nor the blue dress.
Nor Brazil nor Argentina got to the finals.
C O R R E CT
You can have either the chocolate or the ice cream.
I will buy neither the red nor the blue dress.
Neither Brazil nor Argentina got to the finals.
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
PRESENT PERFECT CONTINUOUS VS. 
PRESENT PERFECT VS. SIMPLE PAST
Present Perfect Continuous
• Action that started in the past and continues 
 up to the present.
Simple Past
• Isolated action that started and finished 
 at a specified moment in the past.
Past PastPresent Present
Family Dinner
Om
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
275
Present Perfect
• Focus on continuity and duration
• Action that happened at an unknown or irrelevant moment in the past with relevance, influence or result in 
the present. The speaker looks to the past from the present.
• Action that started in the past and continues into the present (support with adverbs).
Past(?) Present
Let’s compare the use of each of these verbs in the same context and analyze the meanings.
1. Simple Past 
Tim – I lived in a country house but we moved* 
to the city in 1978** because of dad’s job. 
4. Present Perfect Continuous
Tim – I’ve been living in a country house since I was 
little, so I’m reluctant to live in an apartment.
3. Present Perfect—Second Use 
Tim – I’ve lived in a country house since I was little, 
so I’m reluctant to live in an apartment. 
2. Present Perfect—First Use
Tim – I’ve lived in a country house before we moved 
to the city because of dad’s job. Maybe that’s 
why I don’t really like living in an apartment. 
*By using the simple past, Tim locates the action in 
a single point in the past, with no relevance to the 
Present. 
**Notice the indication of time. 
By using the present perfect, Tim relates the fact that 
he’s lived in a country house as the cause of him 
not enjoying living in an apartment in the present 
moment. It is a case of influence to the present. 
By using the present perfect with the adverb “since,” 
Tim indicates that this action is still happening in the 
present and this is the reason why he doesn’t want to 
live in an apartment. 
By using the present perfect continuous, Tim makes 
it clear that he never lived in any other house, 
focusing on the continuous aspect of this action, 
leaving no doubt of its connection to the present.
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L E S S O N 4
INTERMEDIATE 3
276
:: STAY ALERT
The present perfect with the aspect of continuity and the present perfect continuous are interchangeable. 
It is the speaker who chooses which verb form to use. 
Tim has always lived in this house.
Tim has lived in this house since his childhood. 
Tim has been living in this house since his childhood.
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
Gil – Dude, did you see the last episode of Locked 
Underground? 
Phil – I haven’t been following any TV shows to be honest. 
Gil – Oh man, you have to check that one out. It was insane!
Phil – You know I don’t have a TV, right?
Gil – What? You’ve lived without a TV since you moved out 
of your parents’?
Phil – Yeah and I don’t really miss it. I’ve read a lot of books, 
though. 
Gil – Whatever makes you happy. I won’t try to convince you.
Phil – Yeah, right.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
I N C O R R E CT
I’ve been to Paris in 2010.
I have been lived here for ten years.
C O R R E CT
I went to Paris in 2010.
I have been living here for ten years.
WOULD YOU MIND…?
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
• Use
Reality Shows 
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L A N G U A G E G U I D E
277
:: EXAMPLES IN CONTEXT
Picking up the Kids 
Cristina – Hi, Derek. It’s Cristina, Tommy’s mother. How are you?
Derek – Oh, hi, Cristina. I’m fine, thanks. And you?
Cristina – I’m good too. But I have a meeting at work today, and my husband is on a business trip.
 Would you mind picking up Derek when you pick up your kids at school?
Derek – Oh, no. Of course not! I’ll bring him home with my kids.
Cristina – Thank you very much. Would you mind if I passed by at around eight p.m. to pick him up? Is it too late?
Derek – No, that’s fine.
Cristina – All right. Thank you again.
Derek – No problem!
Would you mind → Used to ask for favors or permissions in which people believe the answer 
 might be negative, either because you are not close to the other person or 
 because it can be a delicate matter.
• Structure
Questions
Answers
The structure “Would you mind…?” can be understood as “Would it be a problem…?” 
So, pay close attention to how you can answer this kind of question.
Would you mind if I borrowed your car?
Positive answers: Not at all. (Meaning: No, I don’t mind. / No, it’s not a problem.)
 No. Go ahead.
Negative answers: Yes. (Meaning: Yes, I mind. / Yes, it’d be a problem.)
 Yes, I would.
Permissions: Would you mind + if + I + Verb in the Past + Complement
 Would you mind if I borrowed your car?
Favors: Would you mind + Verb in –ING form + Complement
 Would you mind taking a picture of us?
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10
/9
8.
L E S S O N 4
INTERMEDIATE 3
R E V I E W
HOW TO GIVE YOUR OPINION USING A STRATEGY
FRAMEWORK: DISCOURSE WITH PRESENT PERFECT
278
:: STAY ALERT
Would you mind…? Used either to talk to people you are not close to or to ask favors
 or permissions.
Could you/I…? Used in polite favors or requests.
Can you/I…? Used in neutral/informal favors or requests.
:: COMMON MISTAKES
I N C O R R E CT
Would you mind if I go with you?
Would you mind to help me with this?
C O R R E CT
Would you mind if I went with you?
Would you mind helping me with this?
:: USE AND STRUCTURE
Argumentation → Opinion Supported by Data 
 → Rhetorical Strategies, Analyzing Pros and Cons, Quotations, Paraphrase, and Summary 
Present Perfect → Refers to past from a present perspective.
 → First use: Actions that started in the past and continue up to the present.
 → Second use: Actions that happened in the past but are relevant in the present. 
Let’s take a look at each argumentative strategy and how the present perfect is used in them.
• Rethorical Strategies
The following dialogue will show you some possible uses of the present perfect to support opinion:
Appeal to Logic or Reason 
Inductive reasoning
(facts → generalizations)
Deductive reasoning
(generalizations → facts)
Appeal to Credibility 
The source of data to
support your opinion 
must be reliable.
Appeal to Readers’ Emotion
Relating to the readers’ past
involving the reader/listener in 
the argumentation, etc.
O
 m
at
er
ia
l d
id
át
ic
o 
é 
de
 u
so
 e
xc
lu
si
vo
 e
 r
es
tr
ito
 a
o 
pr
oc
es
so
 d
id
át
ic
o-
pe
da
gó
gi
co
 d
o 
al
un
o:
 Y
or
dh
an
na
 M
yl
a 
C
ab
ra
l C
os
ta
 | 
C
P
F
 1
34
12
61
87
56
 
 y
or
dh
an
na
@
gm
ai
l.c
om
 | 
55
21
99
25
32
58
9 
| P
ro
ib
id
a 
a 
re
pr
od
uç
ão
 to
ta
l o
u 
pa
rc
ia
l, 
se
m
 a
ut
or
iz
aç
ão
. L
ei
 n
º 
96
10